Skip to main content

Full text of "The man of business and railroad calculator : containing such parts of arithmetic as have a special application in business transactions ..."

See other formats


THE 


T\ 


( 


1 


liSS, 


-AND- 


liMi)  tt 


J 


Li, 


E^V.  iEANTLET  YOEK, 


i\n 


^/^^xi.  /© yj^- 


fM     r  •    •  .■ 


■ 


liortb  Carolina  State  Library 
Raleigh 

THE 

MAN  OF  BUSINESS 


—AND- 


RAILROAD  CALCULATOR 


CONTAININa 


8VCH  PARTS   OF  ARITHMETIC  AS  HAVE  A  SPE- 
CIAL APPLICATION  IN  BUSINESS 
r  TRANSACTIONS, 


— AND  ALSO- 


ABRIDGED   FORMS   OF    OPERATION  ;    TOGETHER   WITH 

SUCH    PROOFS  AS   ARE   REQUISITE  TO   TEST 

THE  ACCURACY  OF  EACH  OPERATION. 


BY  REV.  BRANTLEY  YORK,  D.D. 

^    >    ^     \        u    •»  '  ^         -'■'-'  )  .    .    >      ,     ,     ^        "     J  J    s    ,.  J      J     .    J 

^    J  ^     ^     o      '    '        *        *      ''  '^  ,"•  ^  t   ,      6     '  y'       J  3  J    J    :>       5   *  -♦ 

:>      J        ^       'T6-' WHICH  ARE  APPENDED  A  FEW  OP  THE 

PLAm-fei^ ' 'LEC^A^L  ''-FOR  MS 

NECESSAEY  IN  OKDINARY  BUSINESS, 

PREPARED  BY 

RICHARD  WATT  YORK,  A.  M. 

Attorney  and  Counsellor  at  Law. 
RALEIGH : 

JOHN  NICHOLS  A   CO.,  BOOK  AND  JOB  PRINTERS, 
1873. 


R5C 


•»««/ 


^^  r-(  Q 


G 


rr\ 


c       c        C    C    t     c 
'^     C     t      t   c      c      c 


'      c  c  ■     t    '       ,^ 


c       c    tc  e      ec      ^«        c 

f  t  t        c-      "  s  t   ,.,       f   c 


^       ^  C         ^          <     ^             C         ^      C         C      c  C  c  ' 

'  '          t  c      c      c           c  c      c-Cc    e  c  c  c  c 

c  t    c     c   c    c        o    c    e      o    e--  c  c  c 

'-  '^cc          ccc«eec  ec  a  tcc  c 


CONTENTS. 


Preliminaries,  "^^^^; 

Numbers,  ^ 

Methods  of  expressing  numbers,  t 

Arabic  Method,  I 

Fundamental  or  Ground  Rules,  7 
bigns  by  which  the  operations  are 

indicated,  r. 

Axioms,  n 

Ground  Eules-Methods  of  proof,      9 
Subtraction,  -r, 

Multiphcation,  iV 

Division,  -jo 

Practical  rules  deduced  from  the 

foregoing  principles,  13 

Denominate  Numbers  13 

Reduction  of  Denominate  Num- 
bers, 
Enghsh  Money, 

^w''-^^?°'^    °^    Commercial 
Weight, 

Troy  or  Mint  Weight, 

Apothecary's  Weight, 

Linear  or  Long  Measure, 

Mariner's  Measure, 

Cloth  Measure, 

Surface  or  Square  Measure 

Surveyor's  or  Engineer's  Measure 

Cubic  or  Solid  Measure, 

Wine  Measure, 

Ale  or  Beer  Measure, 

Dry  Measure, 

Time  Measure, 

Circular  Measure, 

Table  of  particular. 

Books  and  Paper, 

Properties  of  numbers, 

Factoring, 

Rules  for  Factoring, 

The  greatest  Common  Divisor  or 

Measure, 
Solution  of  Problem, 
The  least  Common  Multiple 
To  find  the  least  Common  Mul- 
tiple, 
Problems  for  Solution 


15 
16 
17 

17 
18 

18| 

isl 

191 

19 

20 

21 

21 

22 

23 

23 

24 

24 

25 

26 

26 

27 
28 


Fractions, 
Propositions, 

Different  kinds  of  Fractions, 
Reduction  of  Fractions, 
Decimal  Fractions, 
Reduction  of  Decimals, 
Decimal  Currency, 
Metahc  Currency, 
Duodecimals, 
Analysis, 

Abridged  Forms  of  Operations- 
General  Rules, 
Table  of  Aloquot  Parts, 
Special  Rules, 

The  Extended  Multiphcation  Ta- 
ble, 
Per  centage, 

The  Basis  and  Rate  per  cent,  be- 
ing given  to  find  the  P'r  Centage. 
The  Rate  p'r  cent,  and  Per  Centape 

given  to  find  the  Basis, 
The  Basis  and  Per  Centage  given 

to  find  the  Rate, 
The  Basis  and  Rate  per  cent,  given 
I     to  find  the  Amount, 
The  Basis  and  Rate  per  cent,  given 
j     to  find  the  difference. 
Amount  and  Rate  per  cent,  to  find 

the  Basis, 
Difference    and     Rate    per    cent. 

given  to  find  the  Basis, 
Basis  and  Resultant  number  given 

to  find  the  Rate  per  cent. 
To  find  what  Per  Cent,   a 
number    is    of    another 
number. 
Formulas  of  Per  Centage, 
Rate  Per  Cent,  above  100, 
Basis  and  Rate  per  cent,  given  to 

find  Per  Centage, 
Basis  and  Rate  per  cent,  given  to 

find  Amount, 
Amount  and  Rate  per  cent,  given 

to  find  the  Basis, 
Partnership  or  Company  business, 


Pag 


given 
given 


e. 
'30 
31 
32 
33 
36 
38 
38 
39 
39 
40 

42 
43 
45 

47 
■51 

53 

54 

55 

56 

56 

57 


58 

59 
60 
60 

61 

61 

61 
62 


II 


CONTENTS. 


Page. 

Baukruptcy  or  lusolvency,  (55 

Assessing  Taxes,  6(5 

Commissiou,  Brokerage  &  Stocks,  (>8 

lusnrauce,  70 

Profit  and  Loss,  71 

Exchange,  72 

The  form  of  Inland  Draft,  73 

Barter,  73 

Custom  House  Business.  75 

Per  Centage  involving  Time,  77 

Simi)le  Interest,  77 
Principal.    Rate    per    cent.,    and 

Time  given  to  find  the  Interest,  77 
Method  of  computing  Interest  on 

English  money,  81 
Interest,  Bate  i^er  cent.,  and  Time 

given  to  find  the  Principal,  83 
Principal,  Interest,  and  Rate  per 

cent,  to  find  Time,  84 
Principal,  Int'rest,  and  Time  given 

to  find  Rate  per  cent.,  84 

Partial  Payments,  85 

Formulas,  86 

Compound  Interest,  87 

True  Discount,  89 

Bank  Discount,  90 


Page. 
Equation  of  Payments,  91 

Find  the  Time  for  any  Principal 

at  a  given  rate  to  double  itself,  93 
Mensuration,  93 

Mensuration  of  Surfaces,  94 

Land  Measure,  95 

Flooring,    Ceiling,    Roofing    and 

Carpeting,  98 

Plasterer's,  Painter's,  Paver's  and 

Carpenter's  Work,  100 

Board  Measure,  101 

Mensuration  of   Log    or  Ruond 

Timber,  103 

Mensuration  of  Solids  or  Volumes,  104 
Crib  and  Box  Measure,  105 

Mason's  and  Bricklayer's  Work,  106 
Heights  and  Depths  measured  by 

the  velocity  of  falling  bodies,  107 
Distances  measured  by  the  velo- 
city of  Sounds,  109 
Gauging  Casks,  109 
Miscellaneous,  111 
Cause  and  Effect,  111 
Rvile  for  Extracting   the  Square 

Root,  115 


Legal  Forms, 


120,  147 


PREFACE. 


An  ardent  desire  to  be  useful,  has  prompted  the  author 
to  prepare  this  work  for  publication.  If  this  object  be  at- 
tained, he  will  have  reached  the  height  of  his  ambition. 

Long  experience  in  teaching,  and  attentive  observation, 
have  convinced  him  that  this  or  some  similar  work  is  need- 
ed ;  it  is  a  fact  patent  to  business  men  generally  that  not  a 
few  of  those  who  go  into  any  of  the  business  departments  of 
the  country,  notwithstanding  they  may  have  gone  through 
an  academical  course  of  instruction,  have  to  learn  how  to 
transact  business  efficiently,  after  they  engage  in  it.  How 
far  this  work  may  go  in  supplying  the  wants  of  any  com- 
munity in  this  respect,  is  not  for  the  Author  to  decide ;  but 
it  is  left  for  a  discerning  and  appreciating  public  to  deter- 
mine. 

Dispatch  and  accuracy  are  prime  qualities  in  all  business 
transactions:  time  is  not  only  money;  but,  in  many  res* 
pects,  it  is  more.  In  the  Man  of  Business  and  Rail  Road 
Calculator,  the  means  are  ample  for  acquiring  both  these 
qualities;  the  former  may  be  acquired  by  attentively  study- 
ing the  abridged  forms  of  operation ;  the  latter  by  applying 
the  tests  of  accuracy  as  exhibited  in  the  proofs  of  the  vari- 
ous operations. 

This  work  is  not  intended  to  supercede  any  Arithmetic 
in  use ;  but  to  aftord  the  means  in  a  condensed  form  for  ac- 
quiring a  business  education ;  it,   however,  contains  a  suffi- 


4  PREFACE. 

cient  number  of  arithmetical  principles  and  7'ules  for  the  so- 
lution of  all  the  questions  or  problems  which  it  contains. 

Though  care  has  been  taken  to  avoid  error  both  in  theory 
and  practice,  yet  doubtless  some  will  be  found,  and  the 
Author  will  be  obliged  to  any  one  discovering  any  errors  in 
it,  to  promptly  point  them  out  to  Mm. 

This  book  is  not  intended  for  the  use  of  private  learners 
only ;  but  also  for  schools — in  short,  for  all  who  may  see 
proper  to  use  it. 

In  the  preparation  of  this  work,  various  Authors  have 
been  consulted ;  but  the  Author  deems  it  unnecessary  to 
specify  any. 

Had  the  Author  possessed  the  advantage  of  vision,  some 
of  the  forms,  perhaps,  would  have  been  arranged  to  better 
advantage;  but  the  book,  such  as  it  is,  is  now  offered  to  a 
.discriminating  and  indulgent  public. 

THE  AUTHOR. 

RurFiN  Badqek,  March  5th,  1873. 


PRELIMINARIES. 

Definitions^  Principles^  and  Rules. 

Article  I.  1.  Quantity  is  anything  which  is  susceptible 
of  measurement. 

2.  Arithmetic  is  the  science  of  numbers,  and  the  art  of 
computation. 

3.  A  unit  is  a  single  thing  denoting  a  whole,  and  is  eith- 
er abstract  or  concrete. 

4.  An  abstract  unit  does  not  express  the  kind  of  unit ;  as, 
one,  two,  &c. 

5.  A  concrete  unit  expresses  the  kind  of  unit ;  as,  one  ap- 
ple, one  pound  of  tea<,  etc. 

NUMBERS. 

II.  1.  A  nurnber  is  a  unit  or  a  collection  of  units;  as,  one, 
two,  six,  etc. 

3.  An  abstract  number  expresses  number  simply,  irrespec- 
tive of  the  kind  of  unit. 

3.  A  concrete  or  denominate  number  expresses  the  kind  sf 
unit  designated ;  as,  two  pounds,  five  yards,  etc. 

4.  A  simple  number  expresses  one  kind,  whether  abstract 
or  concrete. 

METHODS  OF  EXPRESSING  NUMBERS. 

ni.  1.  There  are  three  methods  of  expressing  numbers, 
viz: 


6  THE   MAX   or   BUSINESS 

1.  By  written  or  printed  imrds ;  as,  four,  nine,  etc. 

2.  By  capital  letters  called  the  Roman  Method.  For  this 
purpose,  seven  capital  letters  are  used,  viz:  I,  one,  V,  five, 
X,  ten,  L,  fifty,  C,  one  hundred,  D,  five  hundred,  M,  one 
thousand. 

3.  By  figures  called  the  Arabic  Metlwd ;  as,  1,  3,  3,  4,  etc. 

IV.  There  are  four  principles  involved  in  expressing 
jQumbers  by  the  Roman  Method. 

1.  A  letter  of  less  value,  prefixed  to  one  of  greater  value, 
subtracts  its  value  from  the  greater;  as,  IX=nine, 

2.  A  letter  of  less  value,  annexed  to  one  of  greater  value, 
adds  its  value  to  the  greater ;  as,  XI==eleven. 

3.  A  letter  rejDeated,  repeats  its  value;  as,  C  C,  =two 
hundred. 

4.  A  dash  placed  over  a  letter,  multiplies  it  by  one  thou- 
sand ;  as  T=five  thousand. 

Note. — This  method  is  now  principally  used  to  number  volumes,  chapters 
of  books,  primary  rules,  to  mark  the  hours  on  the  faces  of  clocks  and  watch- 
es, dates  engraven  on  tomb-stones,  and  generally  to  express  the  number  of 
dollars  on  bank  bills. 

EXERCISES. 

V.  1.  Express  by  the  Roman  Notation  the  following 
numbers,  4,  15,  19,  30,  34,  40,  49,  50,  60,  72,  300,  95,  500, 
800,  1000,  1200,  150,  600,  1873. 

2.  Express  the  following  Roman  Notation  in  figures, 
XII,  XIII,  XYI,  XX,  XXVII,  XL,  LXV,  LXXIII,  CCC, 
XC,  D,  DCCCC,  MD,  MDCC,  M,  MDCCC,  LXXIII. 

ARABIC  METHOD. 

VI.  1.  There  are  ten  characters  used  in  the  Arabic  Meth- 


AND   EATL   ROAD    CALCULATOR.  7 

od,  called  figures,  viz:  1,  3,  -8,  4,  5,  6,  7,  8,  9,  0.  Nine  of 
these  are  called  digits  or  significant  figures,  the  other  is 
called  naught  or  cipher. 

2.  Figures  have  two  values,  a  positive  and  a  local  value. 
A  figure  has  a  positive  value,  when  it  stands  alone  or  oc- 
cupies the  unit's  place;  thus  5  expresses  simply  five  units; 
but,  if  another  figure  he  v/ritten  on  the  right  hand  of  it,  its 
value  becomes  local ;  thus  55  ;  its  value  now  is  fifty  units  or 
five  tens,  tens  being  the  scale  expressing  the  law  of  increase 
and  decrease. 

3.  All  the  operations  in  Aritlmietic  are  performed  by 
variously  combining  these  figures. 

FUNDAMENTAL  OR  GROUND  RULES. 

VII.  1.  Notation  and  Numeration,  Addition,  Subtrac- 
tion, Multiplication  and  Division  are  called  fundamental  or 
ground  rules;  because  some  of  them  underlie  or  are  the 
foundation  of  all  other  operations. 

SIGNS  BY  WHICH  THE  OPERATIONS  ARE  INDICATED. 

VIII.  1.  Two  short  parallel  lines  (==)  equal  to,  are 
placed  between  two  numbers  or  quantities  of  equal  value ; 
as,  2+5=7. 

2.  An  upright  cross  (-f)  called  plus,  is  the  sign  of  Addi- 
tion; as,  2-f4=6. 

3.  A  short  horizontal  line  ( — )  called  minus,  is  the  sign  of 
Subtraction.  The  minuend  is  written  on  the  Ze/ihand,  and 
the  subtrahend  on  the  right;  as  8  min. — 2  sub.  =6. 


S  THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

4.  An  oblike  cross  (X)  called  times  or  into,  is  the  sign  of 
Multiplication;  as,  5X4=20. 

5.  The  sign  of  division  is  a  horizontal  line  drawn  be- 
tween two  dots  (-^)  called  *'6y."  The  Dividend  should  be 
written  on  the  left,  and  the  Divisor  on  the  right  hand.  Ex. 
24-|-6=4.  This  operation  is  sometimes  indicated  by  a  sin- 
gle line  with  the  Dividend  written  above,  and  the  Divisor 
below;  thus,  ?1=4,  or  by  a  curve  and  horizontal  line  uni- 
ted ;  thus  6  /21. 

6.  The  sign  of  aggregation,  a  parenthesis,  (  ),  including 
several  numbers  or  a  vinculum, ,  drawn  over  them,  in- 
dicates that  the  value  of  the  expression,  is  to  be  used  as  a 
single  number.  Thus  (12-f3)X5  indicates  that  the  sum  of 
12  and  3,  is  to  be  multiplied  by  5 ;  and  10-)-(8 — 2)-4-2,  indi- 
cates that  the  difference  between  8  and  2,  divided  by  2,  is 
to  be  added  to  10. 

7.  The  sign  of  a  conclusion,  is  three  dots  placed  thus  (.  *.) 
called  tlierefore. 

AXIOMS. 

IX.  The  operations  of  Arithmetic  as  a  branch  of  Mathe- 
matics, are  based  upon  certain  axioms.  An  axiom  is  a  self- 
evident  truth  of  which  there  are  several  kinds  as  follows: 

1.  If  the  same  quantity  or  equal  quantities,  be  added  ta 
equal  quantities,  the  sums  will  be  equal. 

2.  If  the  same  quantity  or  equal  quantities  be  suMracted 
from  equal  quantities,  the  remainders  will  be  equal. 

3.  If  the  same  quantity  or  equal  quantities  be  addedj  to 
unequal  quartities,  the  sums  will  be  unequal. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  ^ 

4.  If  the  same  quantity  or  equal  quantities  be  subtracted 
from  unequal  quantities,  the  remainders  will  be  unequal. 

5.  If  equal  quantities  be  multiplied  by  the  same  quantity 
or  equal  quantities,  the  products  will  be  equal. 

6.  If  equal  quantities  be  divided  by  the  same  quantity  or 
equal  quantities,  the  quotients  will  be  equal. 

7.  If  the  same  quantity  be  both  added  to  and  subtracted 
from  another,  the  value  of  the  latter  will  not  be  changed. 

8.  If  a  quantity  be  both  multiplied  and  divided  by  the 
same  quantity,  its  value  will  not  be  changed. 

9.  If  two  quantities  be  equally  increased  or  diminishedj 
the  difference  will  not  be  changed. 

10.  Quantities  which  are  equal  to  the  same  quantity,  are 
equal  to  each  other. 

11.  Quantities  which  are  like  parts  of  equal  quantities, 
are  equal  to  each  other. 

12.  The  whole  of  a  quantity,  is  greater  than  any  of  its  parts. 

GKOUND  RULES — METHODS  OF  PROOF. 

X.  1.  Notation  is  the  expression  of  numbers,  whether  by 
words,  letters  or  figures. 

2.  Numeration  is  reading  figures  correctly  in  their  pioper 
order,  of  which  there  are  two  methods.  The  first  is  called 
the  French  Method,  in  which  the  figures  are  grouped  togeth- 

Mill.  Thous.  Units. 

er  by  threes,  called  periods.  Thus  555,555,555.  The  sec- 
ond is  called  the  English  Method,  and  each  group  contains 
six  figures,  except  the  left  hand  period  which  may  contain 
less.     The  former  is  decidedly  preferable. 


10  THE   MA-N   OF   BUSINESS 

XI.     Addition  is  the  operation  by  which  several  numbers 
e  coUec 
Ex.,  325 


?ire  collected  into  one  aggregate  amount  or  whole 


Operation. 

413 

136 

73 

946  Amount. 

621  Second  Amount. 

325  Top  line,  remaining  Part. 

946  Proof  =  First  Amount. 
Now  since  all  the  parts  are  equal  to  the  whole,  if  we  sepa- 
rate any  one  part ;  as  the  top  line  for  instance,  adding  the 
other  parts,  the  second  amount  will  not  be  equal  to  the  first 
(axiom  12) ;  again,  if  we  add  the  second  amount  to  the  part 
separated,  it  will  be  equal  to  the  first  amount  which  is  the 
proof  of  the  operation,  (axiom  13).  This  process  may  be 
facilitated  by  performing  the  operation  in  the  opposite  di" 
jcection,  though  less  scientific. 

SUBTRACTION. 

XII.     Subtraction  is  an  operation  by  which  the  difference 

min.     sub.     rem. 

of  two  given  numbers,  is  determined.  Ex.  24 — 8=16. 
Proof,  8+16=24.  Second  Method,  or  24—16=8.  Now 
since  24  has  been  diminished  by  8,  it  follows,  if  8  be  added 
to  the  difference,  (16),  the  amount  will  be  24,  equal  to  the 
minuend  (see  axiom  1).  Hence  the  rule  for  proving  sub- 
traction. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  11 

Add  the  remainder  and  subtrahend^  and  their  sum  will  he 
equal  to  the  minuend,  or  suMract  the  difference  from  the  minu- 
end^ and  the  remainder  will  be  equal  to  the  subtrahend.  See 
the  above  example. 

MULTIPLICATION. 

XIII.  Multiplication  is  an  operation  by  which  one  given 
factor  is  repeated  as  many  times  as  these  units  in  another 
given  factor. 

Remark  1.  The  larger  factor  or  number  is  generally  call- 
ed the  multiplicand,  the  less  is  generally  called  the  multiplier., 
and  the  result  of  the  operation  is  called  the  product. 

Remark  2.  If  the  multiplier  is  a  unit,  the  product  will 
be  equal  to  the  multiplicand,  if  the  multij)lier  is  more  than 
a  unit,  the  product  will  be  as  many  times  greater  than  the 
multiplicand,  as  there  are  units  in  the  multiplier;  but,  if 
the  multiplier  is  a  fraction  or  less  than  a  unit,  the  product 
will  be  less  than  the  multiplicand. 

Note. — The  different  positions  of  the  factors  will  make  no 
difference  in  the  result.  Hence  convenience  or  ly  may  be 
consulted. 

Proof. — Kow  since  the  product  expresses  the  result  of 
multiplying  two  factors  together,  it  follows  that,  if  we 
divide  the  product  by  either  factor,  the  quotient  will  be  the 
other.  (See  axiom  8).  Hence  we  have  the  following  rule 
for  proving  multiplication. 

Divide  the  product  by  the  multiplier.,  and  the  quotient  will  be 
equal  to  the  multiplicand.,  or  divide  the  product  by  the  multi- 
plicand., and  the  quotient  will  be  equal  to  the  multiplier  ;  as  ex- 
hibited by  the  following  example.  What  will  12  yards  of 
calico  come  to  at  12%,  cents  a  yard?  Operation,  12X^2)^= 
1.50.     Proof,   1.50^12=121^. 


12  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Note. — There  are  other  methods  of  proving  multiplica- 
tion ;  but  we  deem  the  above  sufficient. 

DIVISION. 

XIV.  Division  is  the  operation  of  finding  how  many 
times  one  number  is  contained  in  another. 

Eemark.  The  container,  or  number  to  be  divided,  is 
called  the  dividend.  The  contained  or  number  expressing 
the  number  of  parts  into  which  the  dividend  is  to  be  divi- 
ded, is  called  the  divisor.  The  number  expressing  the  num- 
ber of  times  which  the  dividend  contains  the  divisor,  is 
called  the  quotient.,  and  that  which  is  sometimes  left  un- 
divided, is  called  the  remainder. 

Rem.  2.  If  the  divisor  is  a  unit,  the  quotient  will  be  equal 
to  the  dividend,  if  the  divisor  contains  more  than  a  unit, 
the  quotient  will  be  less  than  the  dividend  by  as  many  times 
as  there  are  units  in  the  divisor;  but,  if  the  divisor  is  a 
fraction  or  less  than  a  unit,  the  quotient  will  be  greater  than 
the  dividend. 

Rem.  3.  When  the  divisor  is  greater  than  the  dividend, 
a  part  only  of  it  can  be  contained  in  the  dividend  ;  there- 
fore, the  operation  can  only  be  indicated  by  making  the 
dividend  a  numerator  of  a  common  fraction,  and  the  divi- 
sor, the  denominator.  Thus  let  it  be  required  to  divide  3 
by  5.     Operation,  ^. 

Note. — The  dividend  is  a  product,  of  which  the  divisor  is 
one  of  the  factors,  and  the  quotient  the  other.  Hence, 
when  either  factor  is  given,  the  other  may  be  found. 

Proof  of  Division. — Now  since  the  quotient  expresses  the 
number  of  times  which  the  dividend  contains  the  divisor, 
it  follows  that,  if  we  multiply  the  quotient  by  the  divisor, 
adding  in  the  remander,  if  any,  the  product  will  be  equal 
to  the  dividend,  (see  axiom  8),  as  exhibited  in  the  follow- 
ing example.  Divide  24  by  6.  Operation,  24-i-6=4.  Proof, 
6X4=24  or  24-f4=6,  Second  Method.  Hence  the  follow- 
ing rule  for  division. 


AXD   BAIL   KOAD   CALCULATOR.  1 


Q 


Multiply  the  quotient  hy  the  divisor,  adding  in  the  remainder, 
If  any,  and  the  product  will  de  equal  to  the  dividend,  or  divide 
the  dividend  lyy  the  quotient^  and  the  result  will  'be  the  divisor. 
(See  note). 

PRACTICAt,  RULES  DEDUCED  FROM  THE  FOREQOINa 
PRINCIPALS. 

XV.  1.  When  the  price  of  any  concrete  unit,  is  given, 
and  the  price  or  amount  of  given  number  required — Multi- 
ply the  price  hy  the  given  number,  and  the  product  will  be  the 
required  result. 

Ex.  What  will  34  yards  of  calico  come  to,  at  14  cents  a 
yard.     Operation,  24X14=3.36. 

2.  When  the  cost  of  a  number  of  things  is  given,  and  the 
price  of  a  single  concrete  unit  required — Divide  the  cost  by 
the  given  number,  and  the  quotient  tcill  be  the  price  of  a  single 
concrete  unit. 

Ex.  Paid  4.80  for  40  yards  of  cloth — required  the  price 
of  one  yard?  Operation,  4.80-^-40=12,  the  cost  of  a  single 
concrete  unit. 

3.  When  it  is  desired  to  divide  a  concrete  number  into 
any  number  of  equal  parts — Divide  the  given  number  by  a 
7iumber  whose  concrete  units  are  equal  to  the  number  of  parts 
desired,  and  the  quotient  will  be  one  of  the  equal  parts  ;  thus, 
let  it  be  required  to  divide  435  acres  equally  among  five 
persons.     Operation,  435-^5=85,  one  of  the  equal  parts. 

DENOMINATE   NUMBERS. 

XVI.  1.  A  denominate  number  is  a  collection  of  con- 
crete units  of  different  denominations;  as  3  ft.,  4  in.,  5s., 
6(3,  &c. 


14  THE   MAK   OF   BUSINESS 

A  scale  expresses  the  law  of  relation  between  units  of  dif- 
ferent numbers  of  different  kinds. 

3.  The  scale  of  most  denominate  numbers  is  variable  ;  the 
scale  of  the  United  States  currency  is  uniform,  whose  radix 
is  ten;  and  the  scale  of  duodecimals  is  also  uniform,  whose 
radix  is  twelve. 

REDUCTION  OF  PENOMINATE  NUMBERS. 

XVII.  1.  Reduction  of  denominate  numbers  consists  in 
reducing  a  denominate  number  from  one  denomination  to 
another,  without  changing  its  value. 

2.  There  are  two  kinds  of  reduction,  viz :  Descending  and 
Ascending;  the  former  is  affected  by  multiplication,  the 
latter  by  division. 

3.  The  scale,  in  every  case,  must  be  the  rule  of  operation. 

^ote-. — The  principal  tables  of  denominate  numbers  are 
here  inserted,  as  a  matter  of  reference,  accompanied  by 
such  explanatory  notes  as  are  deemed  important. 

ENGLISH  MONEY. 

XYIII.  English  or  Sterling  money  is  the  currency  of 
England. 

TABLE. 

4  Farthings  make  1  Penny,  d. 

12  Pence  make  1  Shilling,        s. 

20  Shillings  make  1  Pound,  £. 

Note  1. — The  English  coins  consist  of  the  Five-Sove- 
reign piece,  the  double  Sovereign,  the  Sovereign,  and 
half  Sovereign,  made  of  Gold ;  the  crown,  the  half  crown, 
florin,  the  shilling,  the  six-pence,  the  four-pence,  the  three- 
pence,   the   two-pence,    the    one-and- half -pence,    and    the 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR. 


1^ 


penny,  made  of  Silver ;  the  penny,  the  half -penny,  the  farth- 
ing, and  the  half-farthing,  made  of  Copper. 

Note  2. — Farthings  are  now  generally  expressed  by  the 
fractional  parts  of  pence;  1  farth.=3€d,  &c. 

JSfote  3. — The  value  of  the  English  Guinea,  is  21  shillings; 
but  the  Guinea,  five  Guinea,  h^lf  Guinea,  quarter  Guinea, 
and  seven-shilling  piece  are  no  longer  coined. 

Note. — The  value  of  the  Sovereign  is  equal  to  1  pound 
Sterling=$4. 84  United  States  currency,  and  the  value  of  the 
Florin  is  equal  to  _L  of  1  £. 


AVOIEDUPOIS  OR  COMMERCIAL  WEIGHT. 

XIX.     This  weight  is  used  for  weighing  almost  any  thing 
except  Gold  and  Silver  and  precious  stones. 

DENOMINATIONS. 

Tb/z,  Hundred- wei gilt.,  Quarter^  Pound.,  Ounce,  and  Dram, 


TABLE 

- 

16  Drams  (dr.) 

make 

1  Ounce,                   Oz. 

16  Ounces 

make 

1  Pound,                   R). 

25  Pounds 

make 

1  Quarter,                  Qr. 

4  Quarters 

make 

1  Hundred-weight,  Cwt. 

20  Hundred-we 

ight 

make 

1  Ton,                         T. 

Note. — The  laws  of  most  States  and  common  practice 
have  adopted  the  decimal  100;  but  formerly  it  was  112  the 
quarter  being  28,  which  is  still  the  standard  of  the  United 
JStates  Government  in  collecting  duties  at  the  custom-houses. 


16  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

TROY  OR  MINT  "WEIGHT. 

XX.     This  weight  is  used  to  weigh  Gold^  Silver^  Jewels^ 
and  Liquors. 

DENOMINATIONS. 

Pound^  Oimce^  PennyweigJit^  and  Grain. 


TABLE. 

24  Grains  (gr) 

make        1  Pennyweight, 

pwt. 

20  Pennyweight 

make        1  Ounce, 

OZ. 

13  Ounces 

make         1  Pound, 

ft). 

Note  1. — Diamonds  and  other  precious  stones  are  weighed 
by  what  is  called : 

Diamond  weighty  of  which  16  parts  make  1  gr. ;  4  gr.,  1 
carrot.  1  gr.  Diamond  weight  is=to  4  gr.,  Troy,  and  1  car- 
rot==3J  ST.  Troy.  In  weighing  pearls,  the  pennyweight 
is  divided  into  30  gr.,  instead  of  24,  so  that  1  pearl  gr.  is= 
5  gr.  Troy,  and  1  carrot==3l  gr.  Troy. 

Note  2. — The  *assay  carrot  is  a  term  used  to  express  the 
proportional  part  of  a  weight,  as  expressing  the  fineness  of 
Gold ;  each  carrot=  ^  part  of  the  entire  mass  used.  Thus, 
pure  gold  is  termed  24  carrot  gold,  and  not  pure  is  termed 
18  carrot  gold,  20  carrot  gold,  etc.,  ie.,  18  carrot  gold  has 
18  parts  of  gold  and  6  parts  alloy,  and  may  be  expressed 
fractionally  thus,  ~^  |?,  ~^^  etc.  Each  assay  carrot  is  sub- 
divided into  4  assay  grains,  and  each  assay  grain,  in  4  assay 
quarters. 

*  Care  should  be  taken  not  to  compound  the  carrot  of  weight  with  assaj/ 
carrot. 


Morth  Carolina  State  Library 
Raleigh 

AND  EAIL  ROAD   CALCULATOR. 


17 


APOTHECAEIBS  WEIGHT. 

XX.     This  weight  is  used  in  weighing  medical  prescrip- 
tions. 

DENOMLN  ATIONS . 

Pound^   Ounce,  Dram^  Scruple^  and  Grain. 


TABLE. 

20  Grains  (gr) 

make 

1  Scruple, 

So. 

3  Scruples 

make 

1  Dram, 

dr, 

8  Drams 

make 

1  Ounce, 

oz, 

12  Ounces 

make 

1  Pound, 

lb. 

Note. — Medicines  are  usually  bought  and  sold  by  Avoir- 
dupois weight. 

Note  2. — In  estimating  the  weight  of  fluids.  45  drops,  or  a 
common  teaspoonful  make  1  fluid  dram,  12  common  table- 
spoonfuls,  about  one  fluid  ounce ;  a  wine-glassful,  abouft^^g 
fluid  ounces,  and  a  common  teacupful  about  4  fluid  ounces, 

LINEAR  OR  LONG  MEASURE. 

XXI.  Linear  measure  has  but  one  dimension,  and  is  used 
in  measuring  distances  in  every  direction. 

TABLE. 


12  Inches  (in)                       make 

1  Foot,                ft. 

3  Feet                                 make 

1  Yard,               yd. 

53^  Yards  or  16/^  Feet    make 

1  Rod  or  Poll,    rd. 

40  Rods                               make 

1  Furlong,           fur. 

8  Furlongs  or  320  Rods    make 

1  Mile,                 m. 

3  Miles                               make 

1  League,            lea. 

693^  Miles            make  1  Degree 

on  the  equator,  deg.  or  o. 

360  Degrees         make  1  Great  Circle  of  the  earth. 

18 


THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 


mariner's  measure. 

XXII.     Mariner's  measure  is  long  measure  chiefly  used  to 
measure  distances  at  sea. 


12  Lines  make  1  Inch,  in. 

4  Inches  make  1  Hand,  hd, 

9  Inches  make  1  Span,  sp. 

6  Feet  make  1  Fathom,  fm. 

120  Fathoms,  make  1  Cable-length,  cl. 

73^  Cable-lengths  make  1  Mile,  mi. 

1  Knot  make  1  11-72  Statute-miles,  st.-m. 

CLOTH  MEASURE. 

XXIII.  This  measure  is  used  in  measuring  dry  goods, 

TABLE. 

1  Nail,  na. 

1  Quarter  of  a  yard,  qr. 

1  Yard,  yd. 

1  Ell  Flemish,  e.  f. 

1  Ell  English,  e.  e. 

SURFACE  OR  SQUARE  MEASURE. 

XXIV.  This  measure  is  used  in  measuring  surfaces  of 
all  kinds. 

TABLE. 

144  Square  Inches      make  1  Square  Foot,  sq.  ft. 

9  Square  Feet        make  1  Square  Yard,  sq.  yd, 

303^  Square  Yards  make  1  Square  Rod  or  Pole,  sq.  rd. 

40  Square  Rods        make  1  Rood,  r. 

4  Roods  make  1  Acre,  a, 

640  Acres  make  1  Square  Mile,  s.  m. 


23^  Inches 

make 

4  Nails 

make 

4  Quarters 

make 

3  Quarters 

make 

5  Quarters 

make 

AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  19 

Note. — Surface  measure  has  but  two  dimensions — length 
and  breath.  Hence  to  find  the  area  or  surface,  when  the 
two  dimensions  are  given,  multiply  them  together,  and  the 
product  will  be  the  area  required. 

Note. — When  the  area  and  one  of  the  dimensions  are  giv- 
en to  find  the  other. 

Rule, — Reduce  the  area  to  the  same  denomination  as  that  of 
the  given  dimension,  then  divide  dp  the  given  dimension,  and 
the  quotient  will  he  the  other  dimension  in  the  same  denomina- 
tion. 

Ex.  A  farmer  wishes  to  lay  off  a  two-acre  lot ;  he  can 
obtain  a  line  in  one  direction  20  rods  long;  what  must 
be  the  length  of  the  other?  Solution.  2  acres=320  rods. 
320^20=16,  the  other  side.  Proof,  16X20=320.  320-f- 
160=2  acres. 

surveyor's  or  engineer's  measure. 

XXV.  This  measure  is  a  kind  of  long  measure,  used  in 
laying  out  roads,  and  running  the  boundaries  of  land. 


table. 

7  92-100  Inches 

make 

1  Link,                L. 

4  Rods  or  66  Feet 

make 

1  Chain,              c. 

80  Chains, 

make 

1  Mile,                m. 

1  Square  Chain, 

makes 

16  Square  Rods,  sq. 

rd. 

10  Square  Chains, 

make 

1  Acre,                a. 

CUBIC  OR  SOLID  MEASURE. 


XXVIv    This  measure  is  used  in  measuring  such  bodies 
■or  things  as  have  length,  breath  and  thickness ;  as  timber. 


stone,  etc. 


20 


THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 


TABLE. 

1728  Cubic  Inches        make  1  Cubic  Foot,  cu.  ft. 

28  Cubic  Feet  make  1  Cubic  Yard,  cu.  yd^ 

40  Cubic  Feet,  hewn  timber,  make  1  Ton,  t. 

16  Cub.  Ft.  or  50  Ft.,  round  tim.,  make  1  Cord  Ft,  c.  ft. 
8  Cord  Feet,  or  128  Cubic  Ft.,  make  1  Cord  of  wood,  c„. 

Note. — Since  cubic  measure  has  three  dimensions,  in  or- 
der to  find  the  solid  contents  of  a  body  or  capacity  of  rooms, 
boxes,  &c.,  multiply  the  three  dimensions  together. 

Note. — A  pile  of  wood  or  bark  8  feet  long,  4  feet  wide, 
and  4  feet  high  contains  1  cord,  because  these  dimensions 
multiplied  together  are  equal  to  128  cubic  feet. 

WINE  MEASUBE. 

XXVII.  Wine  measure  is  used  for  measuring  wine^  and 
most  liquids. 


4  Gills 

make 

LX>JjXk. 

1  Pint, 

pt. 

2  Pints 

make 

1  Quart, 

qt. 

4  Quarts 

make 

1  Gallon, 

gJ. 

63  Gallons 

make 

1  Hogshead, 

hhd. 

2  Hogsheads 

make 

1  Pipe, 

pi. 

2  Pipes 

make 

ITon. 

t. 

Note. — The  number  of  gallons  which  a  barrel  contains  i» 
not  uniform  in  all  the  States ;  some  States  having  adopted 
31)^,  some  32,  and  in  others  varying  from  28  to  32. 

Note. — The  wine  gallon  contains  231  cubic  inches.  The 
imperial  galloa  of  Great  Britain  contains  277.2X4;  con- 
sequently, it  takes  about  6  gallons  of  the  former,  to  make  5 
of  the  latter. 


AND   EAIL   KOAD   CALCULATOR.  21 


ALE  OR  BEER  MEASURE. 

XXVni.     This  measure  is  used  for  measuring  heer^  ale^ 
porter  and  milk. 

TABLE. 

2  Pints  make  1  Quart,  qt. 

4  Quarts  make  1  Gallon,  gl. 

36  Gallons  make  1  Barrel,  bl. 

54  Gallons  make  1  Hogshead,         hhd. 

Note. — A  beer  gallon  contains  283  cubic  inches. 

DRY  MEASURE. 

XXIX.     By  this  measure,  are  measured  all  dry  wares ;  as 
£rain,  seeds,  roots,  fruits^  salt,  coal,  sand,  oysters,  &c. 


1  Quart,  qt. 

1  Peck,  pk. 

1  Bushel,  bu. 

1  Chaldron,  ch. 

Note. — The  measure  adopted  by  the  United  States  is  call- 
ed the  Winchester  bushel;  it  is  a  vessel  of  cylindric  form 
18i  in.  in  diameter,  8  in.  deep,  and  contains  2,150^  cubic 
jnches;  but  the  imperial  bushel  of  Great  Britain,  2,218]^; 
so  that  32  bushels  of  the  latter,  are  about  equal  to  33  of  the 
former. 

Note  2. — The  number  of  pounds  adopted  is  not  uniform 
in  all  the  States;  some  having  adopted  one  number,  and 
some  another.  A  standard  bushel  of  wheat  is  60  lbs.,  of 
corn  shelled  56,  corn  on  the  cob  70,  rye  56,  oats  varying 
:from  32  to  33^,  salt  50,  dried  fruit  variable. 

Note  3. — A  gallon  of  dry  measure  contains  26r|  cubic  in. 


TABLE. 

2  Pints 

make 

8  Quarts 

make 

4  Pecks 

make 

36  Bushels 

make 

22  THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 


TIME  MEASURE. 


XXX.     This  measure  is  used  to  measure  the  various  di- 
Tisions  of  time,  whether  natural  or  artificial. 


TABLE. 

60  Seconds 

make 

1  Minute, 

min. 

60  Minutes 

make 

1  Hour, 

hr. 

24  Hours 

make 

IDay, 

da. 

7  Days 

make 

1  Week, 

wk.. 

4  Weeks 

make 

1  Month, 

mo. 

13  Mo.,  1  da.  6  hrs., 
365  Days  6  hours 

i    make  1  Julian  Year, 

yr. 

12  Calendar  Months 

make  1  Year, 

yr. 

Wote  1. — The  years  are  numbered  from  the  beginning  or 
the  Christian  Era.  The  year  is  divided  into  12  calendaf 
months  numbered  from  January;  the  days  are  numbered 
from  the  beginning  of  the  month ;  hours  from  12  o'clock  at 
night  to  12  at  moon. 

M)te  2. — The  length  ef  the  tropical  year  is  365  days,  5 
hours,  48  minutes,  48  seconds  nearly. 

I^ote  3. — Since  the  length  of  the  year  is  365  years  and  6 
hours,  the  odd  6  hours,  by  accumulating  for  4  years,  make 
a  day,  so  that  every  fourth  year  contains  366  days.  This  is 
called  Bissextile  or  Leap  year.  The  leap  years  are  exactly 
divisible  by  4:  1872,  1876,  1880,  are  called  leap  years. 

JVote  4. — In  business  transactions,  30  days  are  regarded 
as  a  month. 


AND   KAIL  ROAD   CALCULATOR. 


23 


CIRCULAR  MEASURE. 

XXXI.  This  measure  is  used  to  measure  latitude  and 
longitude,  and  the  motions  of  the  heavenly  bodies,  in  their 
respective  orbits. 


TABLE. 


60  Seconds  make 

60  Minutes  make 

30  Degrees  make 

12  Signs  or  360  deg.  make 


1  Minute, 
1  Degree, 
1  Sign, 
1  Circle, 


m, 
deg. 
s. 
c. 


Note. — Care  should  be  taken  not  to  confound  minutes  of 
space,  and  minutes  of  times. 


TABLE   OP  PARTICULARS. 


XXXII. 


12  Units  or  things 

12  Dozen 

12  Gross  or  144  doz. 

20  Things 
100  Pounds 
196  Pounds 
200  Pounds 

18  Inches 

22  Inches,  nearly 


make 

make 

make 

make 

make 

make 

make 

make 

make 

14  Pounds  of  Iron  or  Lead  make  1  Stone. 
21 J  Stones  make  1  Pig. 

8  Pigs  make  1  Pother. 


1  Dozen. 

1  Gross. 

1  Great  Gross. 

1  Score. 

1  Quintal  of  fish. 

1  Barrel  of  flour. 

1  Barrel  of  pork. 

1  Cubit. 

1  Sacred  Cubic. 


24 


THE  MAN   OF  BUSINESS 


BOOKS  AND  PAPER. 

XXXni.  The  terms  quarto^  folio^  octavo^  decimo^  cfec,  in- 
dicate the  number  of  leaves  into  which  a  sheet  of  paper  is 
folded. 

TABLE. 

A  sheet  folded  in    2  leaves  in  called  a  folio. 

quarto  or  4  mo. 

octavo  or  8  mo. 

12  mo. 

16  mo, 

18  mo. 

24  mo. 

32  mo. 
24  sheets  of  paper    make     1  quire. 
20  quires  make    1  ream. 

2  reams  make    1  bundle. 

5  bundles  make     1  ball. 


4 

'             8 

'           12 

'            16 

*           18 

'           24 

*           32 

PROPERTIES  OP  NUMBERS. 

XXXiy.     1.  Numbers  are  divided  into  even  and  odd. 

2.  All  numbers  are  even  which  can  be  divided  by  two 
without  remainder;  hence  24  and  8  are  even  numbers;  be- 
cause they  can  be  divided  by  2  without  a  remainder ;  but  3, 
7  and  9  are  odd ;  since  they  cannot  be  divided  by  2  without 
a  remainder. 

3.  Numbers  again  are  either  prime  or  composite. 

4.  A  number  is  prime  when  it  cannot  be  resolved  into 
factors ;  as  2,  3  and  5  are  prime  numbers ;  because  they  can 
not  be  divided  by  any  number  greater  than  one,  and  less 
than  themselves. 


AND   BAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  25 

5.  Numbers  are  composite,  when  they  can  be  resolved 
into  factors.  Ex.  4,  8  and  9  are  composite  numbers ;  be* 
cause  they  can  be  resolved  into  factors. 

6.  Factors  are  either  composite  or  prime ;  thus  5  and  9  arc 

factors  of  45 ;  but  9  is  a  composite  factor ;  because  it  can  be 

resolved  into  other  factors,  viz :  two  3's. 

Note. — Numbers  whether  prime  or  composite,  are  said  to 
be  prime  to  each  other,  when  they  have  no  common  factor. 

FACTORINa. 

l^XXV.  Factoring  consists  in  resolving  a  composite  num- 
ber into  its  prime  factor,  and  depends  on  the  following' 
principles  and  propositions. 

PRINCIPLES. 

XXXVI.  1.  A  factor  of  a  number,  is  a  factor  of  any  mul- 
tiple of  that  number. 

2.  A  factor  of  any  two  numbers,  is  also  a  factor  of  their 
sum.     From  these  principles  are  deduced  the  following 

PROPOSITIONS. 

I.  Any  number  ending  in  0,  2,  4,  6  or  8,  is  divisil)le  hy  2. 
By  implication,  no  number  is  divisible  by  2  which  does 

not  end  in  0,  2,  4,  6  or  8. 

II.  Any  number  is  divisible  by  4,  when  the  number  denoted 
by  its  two  right  hand  digits,  is  divisible  by  4. 

By  implication,  no  number  is  divisible  by  4,  unless  the 
number  denoted  by  its  two  right  hand  digits,  is  divisible 
by  4. 

III.  Any  number  ending  in  0  or  5  is  divisible  by  5. 


26  THE   MAK   OF   BUSINESS 

By  implication^  no  number  which  does  n©t  end  in  0  or  5, 
is  divisible  by  5. 

rv.  Any  nuniber  ending  0,  two  0'«,  etc.,  is  divisible  dy  10, 
100,  dc. 

V.  Any  composite  number  is  divisible  by  the  product  of  any 
two  or  more  of  its  prime  factors. 

Yi.  Every  prime  number^  except  2  and  5,  ends  in  1,  3,  7  or  9. 

BULES   FOE   FACTORING. 

XXXVII.  To  resolve  any  composite  number  into  its 
prime  factors. 

Divide  by  any  prime  factors  tJiat  will  divide  it  without  re- 
w^inder,  and  continue  the  operation  till  all  the  prime  factors 
are  developed. 

Ex.    Resolve  84  into  its  prime  factors. 

Operation,  84-;-2=42-i-2=21-;-3=7 ;  hence  the  prime  fac- 
tors are  two  2's,  a  3,  and  a  7.     Proof,  2X2X3X'7=84. 

Rem.  1,  It  is  better  perhaps  to  commence  witlr.  the  least 
prime  factor. 

Rem.  2.  For  practical  purposes,  it  is  generally  sufficient 
to  resolve  the  composite  numbers  into  factors,  whether 
composite  or  prime. 

THE   GREATEST   COMMON   DIVISOR   OR   MEASURE. 

XXXYIII.  The  greatest  common  divisor  or  measure^  is  the 
largest  number  that  will  divide  two  or  more  numbers  with- 
out remainder. 

RULES. 

I.  Resolve  the  given  numbers  into  their  prime  factors,  and,  if 
there  is  but  one  factor  common  to  both  or  to  all^  that  is  the  great- 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  27 

est  common  divisor^  tut,  if  there  are  more  than  one  common  fac- 
tor^ their  product  icill  de  the  greatest  common  divisor . 

Ex.     Find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  35  and  49. 

Operation.  The  prime  factors  of  35  are  5  and  7,  and  the 
prime  factors  of  49,  are  two  7's,  hence  7  is  the  only  factor 
common  to  both;  it  is  therefore  the  greatest  common  divi- 
sor. 

Ex.  2.     Find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  24  and  82. 

Operation.  The  prime  factors  of  24  are  three  2's  and  one 
3,  and  the  prime  factors  of  32,  are  five  2's. 

Now,  by  comparing  the  prime  factors  of  both  numbers, 
we  find  that  three  2's  are  common  to  both  numbers;  hence 
their  product  will  be  the  greatest  common  divisor;  thus, 
2X3X3=8. 

II.  Divide  the  greater  number  hy  the  less  and  the  divisor  lyy 
the  remainder  ;  continue  the  operation  till  there  is  no  remainder y 
and  the  last  divisor  will  de  the  divi^r  sought. 

Ex.     Find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  24  and  98. 

Operation.     98-:-24=4+2,  24-f-2=12. 

Now,   sines  there  is  no  remainder,   2  the  last  divisor,  is 

the  greatest  common  divisor. 

M)te. — If  there  are  more  than  two  numbers,  first  find  the 
greatest  common  divisor  of  two;  secondly,  find  the  great- 
est common  divisor  of  the  divisor  thus  found,  and  another 
number,  and  so  on,  till  sill  the  numbers  are  exhausted,  and 
the  last  divisor  will  be  the  divisor  sought. 

SOLUTION    OF   PROBLEMS. 

XXXIX.  Ex.  A  farmer  has  12  bushels  of  Oats,  18  bush- 
els of  rye,  21  bushels  of  corn,  and  30  bushels  of  wheat.  Re- 
quired the  largest  boxes  of  uniform  size,  and  containing  an 


^8  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINESS 

-€xact  number  of  bushels  into  which  the  grain  can  be  put, 
each  kind  by  itself,  and  all  the  boxes  to  be  full,  and  also 
the  number  of  boxes  necessary  to  contain  the  grain? 

Ans.  38  boxes  containing  3  bushels  each. 

Solution.  Find  the  greatest  common  divisor  of  all  the 
numbers  given,  and  this  common  divisor  will  be  the  size  of 
the  box  sought,  (which  in  this  case  is  3) ;  then  divide  the 
sum  of  the  given  numbers  by  the  greatest  common  divisor, 
and  the  quotient  will  be  the  number  of  boxes  sought,  thus 
(12+18+24+30)^3=28,  number  of  boxes. 

Ex.  2.  I  have  3  fields,  one  containing  16  acres,  the  sec- 
'Ond  20  acres,  and  the  third  S4  acres.  Required  the  largest 
;size  lots  containing  each  an  exact  number  of  acres,  into 
which  they  can  be  divided,  and  the  num])er  of  lots.  Ans. 
4  acre  lots,  and  number  of  lots,  15. 

THE   LEAST   COMMON   MULTIPLE. 

XL.  1.  The  common  multiple  of  two  or  more  numbers,  is 
a  number  that  can  be  divided  by  each  of  them  without  a 
remainder;  thus  60  is  a  common  multiple  of  3,  4,  and  5; 
because  60  can  be  divided  by  each  of  them  without  a  re- 
mainder. 

2.  The  least  common  multiple  of  two  or  more  numbers,  is 
the  least  number  that  can  be  divided  by  each  of  them  with- 
out a  remainder;  thus  12  is  the  least  common  multiple  of 
3,  4,  and  6 ;  because  it  can  be  divided  by  each  of  them 
without  remainder. 

3.  A  multiple  of  a  number,  contains  all  the  prime  factors 
of  that  number;  the  common  multiple  of  two  or  more  num- 
bers, contains  all  the  prime  factors  of  each  of  the  numbers; 


AKD   KAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  29 

and  the  least  common  multiple  of  two  or  more  numbers,  con- 
tains only  each  prime  factor  taken  the  greatest  number  of 
times,  it  is  found  in  any  of  the  several  numbers;  hence  the 
least  common  multiple  of  two  numbers,  must  be  the  least 
number  that  will  contain  all  the  prime  factors  of  them,  and 
no  others. 

TO   FIND   THE   LEAST   COMMON  MULTIPLE. 

XLI.     1.  Arrange  the  nurnbers  in  a  horizontal  line. 

2.  Divide  ly  any  prime  factor  that  will  divide  two  or  more 
of  the  numbers  without  remainder. 

3.  Write  the  quotient  figures  together  with  the  undivided 
numbers,  under  a  line  below,  and  continue  the  operation^  till  the 
quotient  figures  become  prime  or  prime  to  each  other. 

4.  Multiply  the  quotient  figures  and  the  divisor  together^  and 
the  product  will  be  the  least  common  multiple. 

Ex.     Find  the  least  common  multiple  of  5,  6  and  9. 
Operation.    315-6.9 

^  5.2.3 

Now,  since  the  quotient  figures  have  become  prime,  the 
operation  can  be  continued  no  farther ;  hence  we  multiply 
thus  3X2X5X^=90,  the  least  common  multiple.  Proof.  Re-- 
solve  the  least  common  multiple  into  its  prime  factors  which 
will  be  the  same  as  those  evolved  by  the  analysis  of  the  giv- 
en numbers;  thus  90-f-3==30-i-2=:15-i-3=:5  ;  hence  the  prime 
factors  are  two  3's,  2  and  5  equal  to  those  above. 

PROBLEMS   FOR   SOLUTION. 

XLIL  Three  men,  A,  B  and  C,  set  out  at  the  same  timCj 
and  from  the  same  point,  to  walk  around  the  same  plat  of 
ground;  A  can  walk  around  it  in  15  minutes;  B  in  20  min- 


:30  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

utes,  and  C  in  25  minu<"es.  Ivequircd  the  time  how  long 
before  they  come  together  at  the  point  from  which  they  set 
out,  and  how  many  times  each  will  have  walked  around  it? 

Solution.  First  find  the  least  common  multiple  of  the 
numbers  given,  and  their  common  multiple  will  be  the  time 
required  in  minutes  which  (in  this  case)  is  300  minutes,  300 
=5  hours,  and  then  divide  the  time  occupied  by  each  one 
in  walking  around,  and  the  quotient  will  express  the  num- 
ber of  times  of  each  one  respectively ;  thus,  300-;-15==20, 
A's  number  of  times.  300-^20=15,  B's  number  of  times. 
300-1-25=12,  C's  number  of  times. 

Problem  2.  A  can  dig  9  rods  of  a  ditch  in  one  day;  B  12 
rods,  in  a  day;  and  C  16  rods:  what  is  the  smallest  number 
of  rods  that  would  afford  exact  days  of  labor  to  each  work- 
ing alone?  In  what  time  will  each  one  do  the  whole  work? 
Ans.  144  rods,  16  days  A's  time ;  12  days  B's  time,  and  9 
days  C's  time. 

FRACTIONS.  ^ 

XLIII.  K  fraction  is  the  expression  of  one  or  more  equal 
parts  of  a  unit.  Hence  the  unit  is  the  foundation  of  all 
fractions.  The  expresion  of  one  of  the  equal  parts  of  a 
iinit,  is  called  the  fractional  unit ;  as,  i,  ^,  J,  &c. 

TWO   KINDS   OP   FRACTIONS,    COMMON  AND  DECIMAL. 

XLIV.  A  common  fraction  consists  of  two  parts,  one 
written  above  the  other,  with  a  line  drawn  between  them; 
thus,  i,  f,  &c.  The  relation  which  the  two  parts  bear  to 
each  other,  is  that  of  dividend  and  divisor^  and  the  line  sepa- 
rating them,  is  one  of  the  signs  of  division.     The  figure  be- 


ANB   EAIL   BOAD   CALCULATOR.  31 

low  the  line  is  called  the  denominator;  because  it  gives 
name  to  the  fraction,  and  express  the  equal  number  of  parts 
into  which  the  unit  has  been  divided,  and  the  figure  above 
the  line,  is  called  the  numerator;  because  it  expresses  the 
number  of  fractional  units  taken  into  the  expression.  The 
valtie  of  a  fraction  is  the  quotient  of  the  numerator  divided 
by  the  denominator. 

From  the  preceding  definitions  we  deduce  the  following 

PROPOSITIONS. 

XLV.  I.  If  the  numerator  de  multiplied  ly  any  number  ^ 
the  denominator  remaining  unchanged^  the  value  of  the  fraction 
will  he  increased  as  many  times  as  there  are  units  in  the  multi- 
plier. 

II.  If  the  denominator  he  multiplied,  the  numerator  remain- 
ing unchanged,  the  value  of  the  fraction  will  he  decreased  as 
many  times  as  there  are  units  in  the  multiplier. 

III.  ^  the  numerator  he  divided,  the  denominator  remaining 
unchanged,  the  value  of  the  fraction  will  he  decreased. 

IV.  If  the  denominator  he  divided,  the  numerator  remaining 
unchanged,  the  value  of  the  fraction  will  he  increased. 

V.  If  hoth  terms  of  a  fraction  he  multiplied  or  divided  hy 
the  same  number,  the  value  of  the  fraction  will  not  he  changed. 

From  the  principles  involved  in  the  preceding  proposi- 
tions, we  deduce  the  following 

RULES. 

XL VI.  1.  To  reduce  a  fraction  to  its  lowest  terms,  di- 
mde  hoth  terms  of  the  fraction  hyjany  number  that  will  divide 
them  without  remainder,  and  continue  the  operation  till  the)f 


32  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

become  prime  to  each  other ;  the  fraction  will  then  te  to  its  low- 
est terms. 

ng 

Ex.  Reduce  43  to  its  lowest  terms :  divide  both  terms  of 
this  fraction  by  7=^-^2=f . 

2.  To  multiply  a  fraction  by  a  whole  number,  either  mul- 
tiply the  numerator  or  divide  the  denominator,  when  this  can  he 
done  without  remainder. 

3.  To  multiply  a  fraction  by  a  fraction,  multiply  the  num- 
erators together  for  the  numerator  of  the  product,  and  the  de- 
nominators together  for  the  denominator  of  the  product. 

Ex.  Multiply  %  by  f.     Operation.     |Xf=j4'^J., 

The  same  result  will  be  obtained,  if  we  divide  the  terms 

of  the  multiplicand  by  the  terms  of  the  multiplier  inverted. 

Now,  let  us  divide  f  by  |  with  its  terms  inverted  (A) ;  thus, 

f-^2=i ;  hence  the  result  is  the  same. 

4.  To  divide  a  fraction  by  a  whole  number,  either  divide 
the  numerator  or  multiply  the  denominator. 

5.  To  divide  a  fraction  by  a  fraction,  invert  the  terms  of 
the  divisor,  and  proceed  as  in  multiplication,  or  divide  the 
terms  of  the  dividend  by  the  terms  of  the  divisor,  when  it  can  he 
done  without  remainder;   thus,    divide   I  by  \.     Operation. 

8  •  4 2 

9-7-3 — t' 

Note. — It  will  readily  be  perceived  that,  if  the  multiplier 
is  a  proper  fraction,  the  product  will  be  less  than  the  mul- 
tiplicand, and,  on  the  other  hand,  if  the  divisor  is  a  proper 
fraction,  the  quotient  must  be  greater  than  the  dividend. 

Note. — The  invertion  of  the  terms  of  the  divisor,  is  only 
done  as  a  matter  of  convenience ;  since,  as  we  have  seen, 
-the  same  result  will  be  obtained,  if  we  divide  both  terms  of 
the  dividend  by  the  corresponding  terms  of  the  diyisor; 
this,  however,  can  only  be  done,  when  the  division  can  be 
effected  without  a  remainder. 


AND   KAIL   EOAD   OALCULATOE.  33 

THE  DIFFEKENT  KINDS  OF  FRACTIONS 

XL VII.  1.  A  fraction  is  proper^  when  its  value  is  less 
than  a  unit :  as,  ^,  f ,  i,  &c. 

2.  A  fraction  is  improper^  when  its  value  is  equal  to  or 
greater  than  a  unit;  as,  -ji  -^,  &c. 

3.  A  simple  fraction  is  a  single  expression;  it  may  be 
proper  or  improper ;  as,  f ,  ~,  &c. 

4.  A  mixed  nurriber  consists  of  an  integral  number,  and  a 
fraction;  as,  3f,  &c. 

5.  A  compound  fraction  is  a  fraction  of  a  fraction  united 
by  of  or  X  as  I  of  |  of  J,  or  |Xt   &c. 

6.  A  complex  fraction  is  a  fraction  having    a  fractional 

numerator   or  denominator  or  both;  as,—  ^,  &c. 

Note. — The  term  complex  applied  to  fractions,  is  only  ad- 
missible as  a  matter  of  convenience ;  since  the  relation 
which  the  two  terms  bear  to  each  other,  is  that  of  dividend 
and  divisor ;  hence  a  complex  expression  expresses  nothing- 
more  than  the  division  of  a  fraction. 

REDUCTION  OP  FRACTIONS. 

XL VIII.  1.  The  reduction  of  fractions  consists  in  chang- 
ing their  form  mthout  affecting  their  'Golue. 

1.  TO  REDUCE  AN  IMPROPER  FRACTION  TO  A  WHOLE  OR  MIXED 

NUMBER. 

1.  2  iioide  the  numerator  ly  the  denominator. 

Ex.  Reduce  ^  to  a  mixed  number.     Operation.    j=3|. 


34  THE   MA'N   OF   BUSINESS 

3.  TO  BEDUCE  A  MIXED  NUMBER  TO  AN  IMPEOPEB  FRACTION. 

Hulc. — MuUi2)Jy  the  whole  number  lyy  the  denominator^  and, 
to  the 'product^  add  tlie  numerator ;  this  amount  icritten  over 
the  denominator  is  the  result  required. 

Ex.  What  improper  fraction  is  equal  to  3f  ? 

Operation,  3j=ll. 

Rem.  The  reason  of  this  rule  is  obvious;  for,  as  one  unit 
has  been  divided  into  as  many  parts  as  indicated  by  the 
denominator,  all  the  other  units  muit  be  divided  into  the 
same  number  of  parts,  and  this  is  done  by  multiplying  the 
whole  number  by  the  denominator,  for  instance  in  the  ex- 
ample above,  one  unit  has  been  divided  into  three  parts, 
and  the  other  three  expressed  by  the  integral  number  di- 
vided into  the  same  number  of  parts,  will  be  ^,  and  since 
there  are  two  fractional  units  expressed  by  the  numerators, 
it  follows  that  ^+1=5^. 

3.    TO  REDUCE  A  COMPOUND  FRACTION  TO  A  SIMPLE  ONE. 

Rule.— Multiply  all  the  numerators  together  for  the  numera- 
tor of  the  simple  fraction,  and  all  the  denominaiors  together  for 
the  denominator. 
Ex.  Reduce  2  of  |  ot  |  to  a  simple  fraction- 
Operation.   I  of  I  of  |=54=J. 

4.  TO  REDUCE  A  COMPLEX  PSACTION  TO  A  SIMPLE  FRACTION. 

Rule. — Invert  the  terms  of  the  denominator  as  direc'ed  in  the 
division  of  fn  c'icn. 

Ex.  Reduce  ]4  ^°  ^  simple  fraction. 
If 

'Operation.      -|=  X-l- 

S 


AND   KAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  35 

Wote. — This  operation  is  proved  by  multiplyiug  the  simple 
fraction  by  the  denominator,  which  will  give  the  numera- 
tor, and,  by  dividing  the  numerator  b}'^  the  simple  fraction, 
it  will  give  the  denominator;  thus,  9X2=18=3=1  i,  again 
2=1  J.    (See  proof  of  division). 


4   •  9 36       3 

-i~7~8 24 


5.    TO  BEDUCE   FRACTIONS   OF   DIFFERENT  DENOMINATORS  TO 
A  COMMON  DENOMINATOR. 

n.  Multiply  each  numerator  by  all  iJie  denominators,  except 
its  own,  for  the  numerators  required,  and  raultiply  all  the  de^ 
nominators  together  for  a  common  denominator ,  and  then  each 
numerator  v^riiien  over  the  common  denominator,  it  will  he  the 
reduction  required. 

Ex.     Reduce  J,  I,  ?  to  a  common  denominator. 

Operation.  1X3X5=15,  3X^X5=20,  3X2V3=18;  de- 
nominators, 3X3X5=30,  expressed  thus,  ^^,  |2  and  ^J. 

u.  Divide  the  common  denominator  hy  each  given  denomina- 
tor respectively,  and  multiply  the  quotieyit  hy  tlie  numerator ; 
thus  30  being  the  common  denominator  in  the  preceding 
example.  30-f-2=15Xl=15,  30^3=10X3=20,,.  30-^5=6 
X3=18,  expressed  ^^  30  and  JS,  the  same  as  before. 

m.  Multiply  both  terms  of  the  fraction  by  any  number  or 
numbers  that  will  make  their  denominators  alike. 

Ex.  Reduce  f  and  |  to  a  common  denominator. 

Now,  if  we  multiply  both  terms  of  f  by  4,  the  result 
will  be  il ;  again,  if  we  multiply  both  terms  of  |  by  3,  the 
result  will  be  /^ — the  denominators  are  now  alike.  This 
last  method  is  called  reduction  by  inspection,  and  often 
facilities  the  operation.  Each  method  may  be  proved  by 
reducing  the  fractions  to  their  lowest  terms. 


36  THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

;^ote. — The  value  of  the  fractions  is  not  changed  in  any 
of  the  preceding  methods ;  because  both  terms  of  the  frac- 
tion have  been  virtually  multiplied  by  the  same  numbers, 
(See  Proposition,  5.) 

TO  FLND  THE  LEAST  COMMON  DENOMINATOR. 

XLIX.     I.  Meduce  all  the  fractions  to  their  loicest  terms. 

II.  Find  the  least  common  multiple  of  the  denominators^  and 
then  proceed  as  in  method  second.  (See  least  common  multi- 
pie.) 

DECIMAL  FRACTIONS.    . 

L.     1.  A  decimal  fraction  is  a  fractional  expression,  in 

which  the  denominator  is  generally  omitted,  and  a  period 

(.  ),  called  a  separatrix,  is  placed  before  the  numerator. 

Eem.  The  limits  of  this  work  will  not  allow  us  to  do 
more  than  briefly  state  a  few  of  the  most  important  princi- 
ples, and  rules  involved  in  decimal  operations. 

2.  In  decimal  fractions,  a  unit  is  divided  into  ten  equal 
parts  called  tenths ;  and  these  again  into  ten  other  parts 
called  hundredths,  and  these  again  into  ten  other  equal 
parts  called  thousandths,  and  so  on. 

3.  Decimal  fractions  follow  the  same  laws  of  increase  and 
diminution  as  integral  numbers ;  hence  they  may  be  con- 
veniently expressed  together,  and  the  expression  is  then 
called  a  mixed  number;  as,  5.5,  read  five  and  five  tenths. 

4.  The  denominator  consists  of  one  and  as  may  naughts 
annexed,  as  there  are  decimal  figures  in  the  numerator. 

5.  The  value  of  a  decimal  fraction  can  never  equal  that 
of  a  unit,  however,  far  extended. 

6.  The  value  of  a  fraction  is  diminished  tenfold  by  pre- 


AND  KAIL  ROAD   CALCULATOR.  37 

fixing  a  naught  to  it ;  but  its  value  is  not  affected  by  annex- 
ing a  naught. 

7.  All  the  operations  in  decimal  fractions  are  performed 
as  in  integral  numbers,  the  only  difficulty  is  in  knowing, 
where  to  place  the  separatrix ;  this,  for  the  most  part,  will 
be  obyiated  by  observing  the  following 

RULES. 

LI.     I.  Separate  on  the  right  hand  of  the  product  as  many 

decimal  figures  as  there  are  in  loth  factors. 

Ex.  Multiply  5.3  by  .5. 

Operation.  5.  SX  5=3. 65. 

Note. — If  there  are  not  enough  places  in  the  product,  pre- 
fix naughts;  thus,  .05X.3=.015. 

II.  Sepa/rate  on  the  right  hand  of  the  quotient  as  many  de- 
cimal  figures  as  will  equal  the  excess  of  decimal  places  in  the 
dividend. 

Ex.  Divide  .25  by  .5. 

Operation.     .25^.5=.  5. 

m.  If  the  decimal  places  in  the  divisor  exceed  those  in  the 
dividend,  annex  enough  ciphei^s  to  make  them  equal,  and  in- 
this  and  every  other  case,  where  the  number  of  decimal  places^ 
are  equal,  the  quotient  will  be  integers. 

Note. — If  it  is  necessary  to  annex  more  ciphers  to  the  di- 
vidend, as  in  case  of  a  remainder,  separate  as  directed  in 
rule  second ;  for  every  cipher  annexed,  makes  an  additional 
decimal  in  the  dividend. 


38  THE  MAK   OF   BUSINESS 

REDUCTION  OF  DECIMALS. 
LII.       1.    To  REDUCE  A   DECIMAL  TO   A  COMMON  FRACTION. 

Note  I. — Supply  the  denominator,  and  reduce  it  to  its  lowest 
terms. 

Ex.  Reduce  .25  to  a  common  fraction;  thus,  1^=1- 

ITote. — If  tlie  decimal  is  a  repetend,  reduce  the  complex 
expression  to  the  form  of  an  improper  fraction,  and  the 
following  rule  will  be  sufficient. 

Rule  II. — Reduce  the  complex  expression  to  tlie  form  of  an 
improper  fraction,  and  divide  by  10,  100,  1000,  <&c.,  as  the 
decimals  may  be  tenths,  hundredths,  thousandths,  <&c.,  and  the 
quotient  will  be  a  common  fraction  of  equal  value. 

Ex.,  first.  Reduce  .l|  to  a  common  fraction. 

Operation.     .  13==\0-^10=^. 

Ex.,  second.     Reduce  .66f  to  a  comic  on  fraction. 

Operation.     .68f-=-?^100=|. 

Ex.,  third.  Reduce  .833|^  to  a  common  fraction. 

Operation.    .833-5=2f-M000=-S=6- 

To  reduce  a  common  fraction  to  decimal. 

Bide  III. — zinnex  ciphers  to  the  numerator^  and  divide  by 
the  denominator,  and  continue  the  operation  till  there  is  no  re- 
mainder, or  till  it  become  a  repetend  ;  in  this  case  3  or  4  places 
<we  sufficient. 

Ex.     Reduce  f  to  an  equal  decimal. 
Operation.     3ooo_  375^     Proof,   ^^l. 

Note. — Fractional  operations  are  for  the  most  part,  prov- 
ed as  similar  operations  in  integral  numbers. 

DECIMAL  CURRENCY. 

LIII.  Dollars,  cents,  and  mills  may  be  called  decimal 
currency ;    since  regarding  the  dollar  as  a  unit,   cents  ex- 


AND   KAIL   ROAD    CALCULATOR.  39 

press  himdreclths  of  dollars,  and  mills  thousands  of  dollars 
or  tenths  of  cents;  hence  the  same  rules  and  principles  ap- 
ply to  decimal  currency  as  to  other  decimal  expressions. 

METALLIC  CURHENCY. 

LIV.  The  metallic  currency  of  the  United  States,  consists 
of  gold,  silver  and  nickel  coins,  (the  last  formerly  called 
copper).  The  legal  gold  coins  are  double  eagle,  eagle,  half- 
eagle,  quarter-eagle,  three-dollar  piece,  and  one  dollar ;  the 
legal  silver  coins  are  the  dollar,  half-dollar,  quarter-dollar, 
dime,  half  dime  and  three-cent  piece ;  a  nickel  is  the  cent. 

Note. — There  are,  however,  in  circulation  fifty-dollar 
piece,  half-dollar  piece  and  quarter-dollar  piece,  though 
they  are  not  legal ;  the  cent  and  half-cent,  though  still  in 
use,  are  no  longer  coined. 

Note. — Decimal  currency  is  only  used  in  accounts,  the 
cents  occupying  two  decimal  places ;  consequently,  where  a 
less  number  than  ten  is  to  be  expressed,  a  cipher  is  put  in 
place  of  dimes;  thus,  .09  equal  9  cents. 

Note. — The  mill  has  no  coin  corresponding  to  its  value; 
in  Vjusiness  transactions,  no  regard  is  paid  to  parts  of  mills, 
and,  when  five  or  more  go  over  from  cents,  business  men 
regard  it  as  one  cent ;  but,  if  less  than  five,  no  attention  is 
paid  to  it. 

DUODECIMALS. 

LY.  Duodecimals  are  a  kind  of  denominate  numbers 
whose  radix  is  12,  i.e.  twelve  of  a  lower  denomination,  make 
one  of  the  next  higher  denomination ;  consequently,  if  we 
divide  a  unit  of  a  higher  denomination  into  12  equal  parts, 
one  12  vnll  be  equal  to  a  unit  of  the  next  lower  denomina- 
tion; regarding  one  foot  as  th^  unit,  if  it  be  divided  into 
12  equal  parts,  one  part  will  be  equal  to  one  prime  or  inch, 


40  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

and,  if  we  divide  this  into  12  other  equal  parts,  one  part 
will  be  equal  to  one  second ;  hence  one  inch  is  one  12th  of 
a  foot,  and  one  second  is  equal  to  one  12th  of  one  12tb, 
equal  to  il4th  of  a  foot. 

The  lower  denominations  are  distinguished  by  marks  af- 
fixed to  them,  called  indices;  thus,  1,'  2,"  3,'"  and  so  on, 
is  read  two  primes,  two  seconds,  two  thirds  and  so  on. 

Note  1. — Since  the  operations  in  duodecimals,  are  simi- 
lar to  other  denominate  numbers,  we  deem  it  unnecessary 
to  give  any  example. 

Note  2. — Operations  may  frequently  be  facilitated  by  re- 
ducing primes  to  the  fraction  of  a  foot. 

Note  3. — Duodecimal  fractions,  as  they  are  sometimes 
called,  are  applicable  to  linear,  surface  and  cubic  measure. 

ANALYSIS. 

LVI.  Analysis  is  the  examination  of  the  several  parts  of 
a  proposition  or  problem,  and  tracing  the  relation  which 
these  parts  bear  to  each  other,  and  to  the  whole,  and  also 
ascertaining  the  part  which  each  element  is  to  act  or  the 
use  which  is  to  be  made  of  it,  in  the  solution. 

The  operation  consists  of  a  series  of  steps  which  general- 
ly bear  the  relation  to  each  other,  of  cause  and  effect,  or 
antecedents  and  sequence.  Such  a  process  resembles  one 
ascending  a  flight  of  stairs,  with  ^  lighted  candle  in  his 
hand;  as  he  ascends,  the  light  continues  to  fall  before  him, 
so  that  the  last  steps  will  be  as  luminous  as  the  first. 

We  generally  reason  from  a  given  number  to  a  unit,  and 
from  that  to  the  number  required  (i.  e  )  we  ascertain  what 
part  of  the  given  efi'ect  a  single  unit  of  the  given  cause,  in 
the  shortest  period  of  time  indicated,  has  or  can  produce, 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  41 

having  ascertained  this  fact  the  rest  of  the  process  comes 
easy;  since  it  is  supposed  that  the  units  of  some  other  cause, 
connected  with  the  preceding  one,  are  equally  potent. 

Ex.  If  3  men,  in  5  days,  can  grade  45  feet  of  road,  how 
many  feet  can  5  men  in  4  days  grade?     Ans.     60  feet. 

Analysis.  Now  since  3  men  can  grade  45  feet,  it  follows 
that  one  man,  in  the  same  time,  can  only  grade  one-third  of 
45  feet ;  thus,  45-f-3=15,  what  one  man  can  do  in  five  days ; 
by  consequence,  he  can  ©nly  do,  in  one  day,  one-fifth  of  15, 
15-i-5=:3  feet.  Now  since  one  man,  in  one  day,  can  grade 
3  feet,  5  men  can  grade  5  times  3=15  feet,  and  that,  in  4 
days,  four  times  15=60. 

Proof. — The  correctness  of  such  operations,  may  be  prov- 
ed by  dividing  each  effect  by  its  own  cause,  if  correct,  the 
ratios  or  quotients,  must  be  equal ;  since  each  quotient  or 
quotients  must  express  what  a  single  unit  of  each  cause  in 
the  same  time  produces;  thus,  45-;-(3X5)=3,  and  that 
60^(5X4)— 3. 

Rem.  The  solution  of  the  preceding  problem,  involves 
four  steps :  the  first  leads  to  what  ©ne  man  can  do  in  the 
specified  time,  the  second  to  what  one  man  can  do  in  one 
day,  the  third  to  what  5  men  can  do  in  one  day,  and  the 
fourth  to  what  5  men  can  do  in  four  days. 

Ex.  3.  If  a  family  of  7  persons,  consume  one  barrel  of 
flour  in  12  days,  required  the  quantity  of  flour  that  would 
be  sufficient  for  43  persons  in  14  days?    Ans.  7. 

Operation,  1^7=^^13=3^X43=^1=^X14=^^=7. 

Rem.  Analysis  is  of  vast  importance ;  since  almost  any 
problem  may  be  solved  by  it,  and  since,  in  a  great  measure, 
it  supei cedes  the  necessity  of  remembering  rules. 


42  THE   M4N   OF   BUSINESS 

ABRIDGED  FORMS  OF  OPERATIONS. — GENERAL  RULES. 

LVII.  Rule  I. — Perform  tlie  operation  mentally  wlien 
practiccMe  ;  for  the  mind  acts  7nore  rapidly  than  words  can  lye 
■uttered  or  figures  made. 

II.     Perform  the  operation  ty  reading  the  nunibers  instead 

^f  the  common  routine. 

Note. — In  reading  numbers,  only  mention  each  partial 
amount  in  addition,  and  in  multiplication,  only  name  the 
right  hand  figure  of  each  partial  product  increased  by  the 
number  carried,  except  the  last  product  which  should  be 
all  expressed;  thus:  instead  of  saying  8  and  4  are  12,  and 
5  are  17,  and  4  are  21,  and  6  are  27,^  &c.,  read  12,  17,  21, 
27,  &c.  Again,  in  the  following  Ex.,  require  the  product 
of  4325X5.  Now  instead  of  saying  5  times  4  are  20,  5  times 
2  are  10,  and  2  are  12,  5  times  3  are  15,  and  1  are  16,  5  times 
4  are  20,  and  1  is  21.  read  0,  2,  6,  21. 

///.    Cancel  like  factors  from  the  dividend  aiid  divisor  when 

obvious;  since  this  will  not  change  the  relation  of  the  numbers 

to  each  other.,  nor  effect  the  value  of  the  quotievt 

IV.  Reduce  such  fractions  as  many  occur  in  the  operation  to 
their  lowest  terms. 

V.  Reduce  fractions  of  different  denominators  to  a  common 
denominator.,  by  inspection^  when  this  can  be  done. 

VI.  In  percentage  use  the  unit  (1)  and  common  fraction  in- 
stead of  the  hundred  ^100)  and  decimal  fraction  ;  since  the  re- 
sults mAist  be  the  same  ;  but  an  operation  by  the  former  method., 
can  be  performed  in  a  much  shorter  tiw.e  than  one  by  the  latter. 

VII.  Multiply  and  divide  by  the  aliquot  parts  of  a  dollar., 
instead  of  the  decimal  number.,  in  performing  operations  in  de- 
cimal currency  or  in  United  States  money. 

VIII.  When  the  multiplicand  is  a  common  fraction.,  and  the 
multiplier  an  integer^  divide  the  denominator  (when  it  can  be 
done  without  remainder^)  insteadof  multiplying  the  numerator. 


AND   EAIL   EOAD   OALOULATOE.  43 

IX.  Divide  each  term  of  the  fractional  dividend  lyy  the  cor- 
responding terms  of  the  divisor^  {when  it  can  he  done  without 
remainder^ )  instead  of  inverting  its  terms  and  multiplying. 

Ex.  Divide  I  by  f .  ^— f =!.  Asrain  with  the  terms  in- 
Yerted«-^3_.4_4_ 

Note. — If  the  aliquot  part  is  a  fractional  unit,  in  multipli- 
cation, divide  the  multiplicand  by  the  denominator  of  the 
fraction,  and  in  division,  multiply  the  dividend  by  the  de- 
nominator of  the  fraction.     (See  table  of  aliquot  parts.) 

TABLE  OF  ALiqUOT  PARTS. 

LVni.     Cents  equal  to     $. 


5 

(( 

li 

20 

6i 

u 

(( 

1 
16 

8i 

u 

(( 

1 

12 

10 

(( 

u 

1 
10 

m 

(( 

u 

>^ 

16f 

CI 

u 

1 
6" 

18i 

4( 

u 

3 
16 

^0 

U 

t ' 

1 
5~ 

25 

U 

(( 

^ 

31i 

t( 

u 

5 
16 

33^ 

(( 

u 

K 

37^ 

{( 

n 

^ 

40 

(( 

u 

2 
5~ 

50 

(i 

u 

K 

56i 

u 

u 

9 
18 

58J 

(( 

u 

7 
12 

.60 

u 

(( 

3 

44 


THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 


62i 
66i 

m 

75 

83J 

87i 


u 
{( 

u 


27 

io 


EXAMPLES  FOR  PRACTICE. 


LIX.  Ex.  1.  What  ■will  150  yards  of  cloth  come  to  at  25 
cents  a  yard? 

Analysis.  Now  since  25  cents  is  equal  to  t^  of  a  dollar^ 
the  cost  of  one  yard,  there  will  be  only  ^  as  many  dollars 
as  yards;  hence,  150-i-4==373^.  Again,  if  I  pay  37)^  dol- 
lars for  cloth  at  ^  of  a  dollar  per  yard,  how  many  yards 
did  I  buy?  Now  since  the  cost  of  one  yard  is  5^  of  a  dol- 
lar, it  follows  that  there  must  be  4  times  as  many  yards  as 
dollars;  hence,  37)^  multiplied  by  4  equal  150  yards. 
Again,  if  I  pay  372^  dollars  for  150  yards;  what  did  it  cost 
per  yard?  Now  it  is  obvious  that  the  cost  of  one  yard  is 
150th  of  37i ;  hence  37J-^150=i==.25. 

JSfote. — Though,  in  the  first  operation,  we  divided  by  4,. 
the  eficct  is  just  the  same  as  multiplying  by  ^,  and  in  the 
second  operation,  we  multiply  by  4,  the  effect  is  just  the 
same  as  dividing  by  3^.     (See  note  under  Kule  2). 

JVote  2. — It  will  be  observed  that  the  two  last  operations 
prove  the  first. 

Ex.  2.   What  will  330  yards  of  sheeting  amount  to  at  16^ 

cents  a  yard.     Operation,  330X6=^5  dollars.     Proof,  paid 

55  dollars  for  sheeting  at  16%  cents  per  yard,  required  the 

number  of  yards?     Operation,  55-^^=330. 

3.  What  will  64  yards  of  calico  amount  to  at  12i  cents  a 
jard? 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  45 

4.  Paid  4^  dollars  for  lining  at  8^  cents  per  yard,  re- 
<linred  the  number  of  yards  bought? 

6.  What  is  the  cost  of  87  bushels  of  potatoes  at  37J  cents 
per  bushel? 

6.  What  will  16  lbs.  of  candles  come  to  at  31)^  cents  per 
pound? 

Let  other  examples  be  supplied. 

X.  Cut  off  all  useless  decimals. 

Note. — In  business  transactions  decimals  need  not  be  ex- 
tended beyond  two  places,  or  three  at  most. 

XI.  Students  should  le  familiar  with  Arithmetical  language^ 
mid  with  all  the  rules^  and  tables  used  to  facilitate  operations. 

XII.  Keep  the  attention  firmly  fixed  on  the  operation  in  hand. 

SPECIAL  BULES.  — ADDITION. 

LX.     Add  two  columns  at  once. 

Note. — ^In  performing  operations  in  this  way,  carry,  as  it 
is  called,  one  for  each  hundred,  and  not  one  for  each  ten. 
The  reason  of  this  will  be  obvious  to  every  thinlcing  student. 

Rem.  This,  at  first,  may  appear  to  students  awkward  and 
cumbersome ;  but  let  them  not  despair ;  but  persevere,  and 
rough  places  will  become  smooth,  and  mountains  plains. 
The  most  expert  accountants  generally  perform  in  this  way. 

ABRIDGED   METHODS   OF   MULTIPLICATION. — SPECIAL   RULES. 

LXI.    When  naughts  occur  on  the  right  hand  of 

EITHER  FACTOR  OR  BOTH. 

Rule  I. — Multiply  the  digits  together,  and^  to  their  product, 

annex  all  the  naughts. 

Ex.     Multiply  240  by  30. 

Operation,  24,0  . 

3,0 

7200 


6  THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

WHEN  THE  MULTIPLIER  IS  10,   100,   1000,  &C. 

//.  Annex  all  the  ciphers  in  the  multiplier  to  the  multipli^ 
4}and,  and  this  will  complete  the  product. 

IF  THE  MULTIPLICAND  IS  A  DECIMAL. 

III.  Bemove  it  (is  mtny  places  towards  the  left  as  there  are 
naughts  in  the  multiplier. 

Ex.  .5X10=5.  Now,  by  moving,  5  one  place  farther  to- 
ward the  left,  it  becomes  an  integral  number. 

WHEN  EITHER  FACTOR  IS  A  COMPOSITE  NUMBER. 

IV.  Multiply  "by  its  factors  instead  of  the  number  itself. 
Ex.  47X35.     35  being  a  composite  number,  we  multiply^ 

by  its  factors  7  and  5;  thus,  47X'7=329X5=1645. 

JVote. — By  strictly  observirg  this  method  much  time  will 
be  saved ;  since  no  addition  is  required. 

WHEN   THE   MULTIPLIER   IS    A   LITTLE    LESS    THAN    10,     100, 

1000,  &C. 

V.  Annex  to  the  multiplicand  as  many  ciphers  as  there  are 
figures  in  the  multiplier,  and  from  the  result  subtract  the  pro- 
duct of  the  multiplicand,  by  the  number^he  multiplier  ladles  of 
Idng  10,  100,  1000,  &c. 

Ex.  Multiply  4232X08. 

Operation,  first  multiply  the  multiplicand  by  3,  the  num- 
ber the  multiplier  wants  of  being  a  hundred ;  thus,  4232X2 
=8464 ;  second,  subtract  this  from  the  multiplicand  with 
two  ciphers  annexed,  423200—8464=414836.     Ans. 

Note. — This  operation  may  be  proved  by  multiplying  the 
factors  together  in  the  usual  way,  and  the  final  results  will 
be  the  same. 


AND   BAIL   EOAD   OALCULATOrv. 


41 


VI.  Multiply  two  figures,  of  the  multiplicand  at  once^ 
Ex.  Let  it  be  required  to  multiply  1225X6. 
Operation,     1225 
6 


7350 


New,  instead  of  saying  6  times  5,  &c.,  say,  or  rather 
think,  6  times  25  is  150,  and  6  times  12  are  72  and  1  is  73. 

Rem.  By  this  method  the  operation  can  be  performed 
more  rapidly  than  figures  can  be  made,  and  to  have  full 
command  of  it,  the  pupils  need  only  be  thoroughly  drilled 
in  the  extended  multiplication  table  (which  see). 

Note. — It  will  be  observed  that  in  performing  operations 
as  directed  above,  that  two  right  hand  figures  are  set  down 
instead  of  one — in  other  words,  carry  for  hundreds,  thou- 
sands, and  none  for  tens. 

THE  EXTENDED  MULTIPLICATION  TABLE. 


2  X13 

= 

26 

3 

X13 

== 

39 

4 

X 

13 

= 

5^ 

2  "  14 

2S 

3 

'■•   14 

42 

4 

14 

56 

2  "  15 

30 

3 

"  15 

45 

4 

15 

60 

2  "  16 

82 

3 

'•  16 

48 

4 

16 

64 

2  "  17 

34 

3 

u  1^ 

51 

4 

17 

68 

2  "  18 

86 

3 

"  18 

54 

4 

18 

72 

2  ''   19 

38 

3 

"  19 

57 

4 

19 

76 

2  "  20 

40 

3 

"  20 

60 

4 

20 

80 

5  X  13 

— 

65 

6 

X13 

— 

78 

7 

X 

13 

— 

91 

5  "  14 

70 

0 

"  14 

84 

7 

14 

1 1 

98 

5  "  15 

75 

6 

"'15 

90 

7 

15 

u 

105 

5  "  16 

80 

0 

''  16 

96 

7 

16 

u 

112 

5  "  17 

85 

6 

"  17 

102 

7 

17 

u 

119 

5  "  18 

90 

6 

"  18 

108 

7 

18 

( » 

126 

5  "  19 

95 

6 

"  19 

114 

7 

19 

u 

13S 

5  "  20 

100 

6 

"  20 

120 

1   7 

20 

i( 

14a 

48 


THE  MAN   OF   BUSINESS 


8  X  13 


8 
8 
8 
8 
8 
8 


14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 


=  104 
"  113 
"  120 
"  128 
"  136 

"  152 


9  X13  =  117 


8  "  20  "  160 


"  14 

"  15 
"  16 
"  17 

"  18 
"  19 


"  126 
"  135 
"  144 
"  153 
"  162 


9  "  20  "  180 


10  X  13  =  130 


10 
10 
10 
10 
10 
10 


14 

"  15 

"  16 
a   17 


19 


10  "  20  "  200 


140 
150 
160 
170 
180 
190 


11 
11 
11 
11 
11 
11 
11 
11 


X13 

=  143 

"  14 

'*  154 

"  15 

"  165 

"  16 

"  176 

u  17 

"  187 

"  18 

"  198 

"  19 

"  209 

"  20 

"  220 

12  X  13  =  156 


12 

12 
12 
12 
12 
12 
12 


14 
15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 


168 
180 
192 
204 
216 
228 
240 


Rem.  This  table  might  be  extended  to  a  hundred  or 
Bven  beyond  that ;  but  our  limits  will  not  allow  us  to  insert 
more. 

Note. — The  science  involved  in  the  multiplication  table 
is  this,  if  we  begin  at  the  smallest  product,  and  add  the 
multiplying  figure  to  it,  the  amount  will  be  the  next  suc- 
ceeding product,  and  S3  on  through  the  entire  ascending 
,'Series;  but,  if  we  begin  at  the  largest  product,  and  sub- 
tract the  multiplying  figure  from  it,  the  difference  will  be 
the  next  succeeding  product,  and  so  on  through  the  entire 
descending  series,  or  what  is  called  repeating  the  multipli- 
cation table  backwards. 

Rem.  Operations  in  multiplication  may  also  be  facilita- 
ted by  a  mental  process  called  inspection,  by  noting  the 
right  hand  figure  (which  will  generally  suggest  the  left)  of 
each  product  arising  from  multiplying  together  any  two 
digits,  without  going  through  the  ordinary  process  of  mul- 
tiplying each  figure  separately. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR. 


4^ 


LXII.     The  following  table  exhibits  the  product  arising 
from  multiplying  any  two  of  the  nine  digits  as  factors. 


Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro  [Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

2x1- 

_      2 

3x1- 



3 

4x1  — 

4 

5 

X 

1- 

-      5 

2  "     2 

"      4 

3  "     2 

(( 

6 

4  "     2    " 

8 

5 

2 

"    10 

2  "     3 

"      6 

3   "     3 

■  i 

9 

4  "     3    " 

12 

5  • 

3 

"    15 

2  "     4 

"      8 

3  "     4 

i( 

12 

4  "     4    " 

16 

5    « 

4 

"    20 

2  "     5 

"    10 

3  "     5 

( ( 

15 

4  "     5    " 

20 

5  ' 

5 

"    25 

2  "     6 

"    12 

3  ''     6 

(( 

18 

4  "     6    " 

24 

5  < 

6 

"    30 

2  "     7 

"    14 

3  "     7 

( ( 

21 

4    ..       7     «; 

28 

5 

7 

"    35 

2  "     8 

"    16 

3  "     8 

( ( 

24 

4  "     8    " 

32 

5 

8 

"    40 

2  "     9 

"    18 

3  "     9 

( ( 

27 

4  "     9    " 

•36 

5 

u 

9 

"    45 

2  "  10 

"    20 

3  "  10 

(( 

30 

4  "  10    " 

40 

5 

u 

10 

"    50 

2  "  11 

"    22 

3  "  11 

'  I 

33 

4  "  11    " 

44 

5 

i( 

11 

"    55 

2  "  12 

"    24 

3  "  12 

(( 

36 

4  "  12    " 

48 

5 

(( 

12 

"    60 

Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

6x1 

_       6 

7x1 



7 

8x1  — 

8 

9 

X 

1 

—       9 

0  "     2 

"    12 

7  "     2 

( i 

14 

8  "     2    " 

16 

9 

2 

"    18 

6  "     3 

"    18 

7  "     3 

I  ( 

21 

8  "     3    " 

24 

9 

3 

"    27 

6  "     4 

"    24 

7  "    4 

a 

28 

8  "     4    " 

32 

9 

4 

"    36 

(J  "     5 

"    30 

7  "    5 

i  I 

35 

8  "     5    " 

40 

9 

5 

"    45 

6  "     6 

"    36 

7  "     6 

.1 

42 

8  *'     6    " 

48 

9 

6 

"    54 

6  "     7 

"    42 

7  "     7 

n 

49 

8  "     7    " 

56 

9 

7 

"    63 

«)  "     8 

"    48 

7  "     8 

n 

56 

8  "     8    " 

64 

9 

8 

"    72 

13  "     9 

"    54 

7  "     9 

( t 

63 

8  "     9    " 

72 

9 

9 

••    81 

6  "  10 

"    60 

7  "  10 

( ( 

70 

8  "  10    " 

80 

9 

10 

"    90 

6  "  11 

"    66 

7  "  11 

il 

77 

8  "  11    ' 

88 

9 

11 

"  yi> 

6  "  12 

"    72 

7  "  12 

I  i 

84 

8  "  12    " 

96 

9 

12 

'*  108 

Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

Factors 

Pro 

10    x    1 

—     10 

11     X     1 



11 

12    X    1  - 

_     12 

10  "     2 

"     20 

11   "     2 

I  4 

22 

12  "     2 

"    24 

10   "     3 

"    30 

11   "     3 

(  ( 

33 

12  "     3 

"    36 

10  "     4 

"    40 

11   "     4 

(( 

44 

12  "     4 

"    48 

10  "     5 

"    50 

11   "     5 

^i 

55 

12  "     5 

"    60 

10  "     G 

"    60 

11  "     6 

11 

66 

12   "     6 

"    72 

10  "     7 

"    70 

11  "     7 

i  i 

77 

12  "     7 

"    84 

10  "     8 

"    80 

11  "     8 

n 

88 

12  "     8 

"    96 

10  "     9 

"    90 

11  "     9 

i  i 

99 

12  "     9 

"  108 

10  "  10 

"100 

11   "  10 

ti 

110 

12  "  10 

"  120 

10  «'  1] 

"  110 

11  "  11 

i  I 

121 

12  "  11 

'<  132 

10  "  12 

"  120 

11   "  12 

n 

132 

12  "  12 

"  144 

ZO  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Note. — The  numbers  10,  11  and  12  are  added  to  make 
tliis  a  common  multiplication  table. 

ABRIDGED  FORMS  OF  OPERATION  IN  DIVISION. 
SPECIAL   RULES. 

LXIII.     Rule  I.  Separate  an  equal nuoriber  of  nauglits  on  tJie 

Tight  of  the  dividend  and  divisor  when  they  occur. 

Ex.  Divide  240  by  30. 

Operation,  24,0-^3^0=8. 

Note. — It  is  obvious  that  the  quotient  is  not  changed, 
since  separating  the  naughts  from  both  terms  is  dividing- 
both  by  the  same  number,  consequently  24  will  contain  ^ 
^s  many  times  as  240  will  contain  30. 

"WHEN  NAUGHTS    OCCUR   ON  THE   RIGHT  HAND  OF  THE  DIVIDEND 

ONLY. 

II.  Separate  as  many  figures  on  the  right  hand  of  the  divi- 
dend as  there  are  naughts  on  the  right  of  the  divisor,  and  pro- 
ceed as  defore. 

Ex.     Divide  675  by  40. 
Operation,  67,5-^4,0=1 6-[-J^=;5. 

Note. — If  there  is  no  remainder  in  the  operation,  the  fig- 
ure or  figures  are  the  true  remainder;  but,  if  there  is  a  re- 
mainder, it  must  be  prefixed  to  the  separated  figure  or 
figures. 

When  the  divisor  is  a  composite  number. 

III.  Divide  the  dividend  ty  one  of  the  factors^  and  the  quo- 
tient hy  the  other,  and  the  last  quotient  icill  he  the  one  sought. 

Ex.  Let  it  be  required  to  divide  568  by  18. 
Ans.  31-1-10. 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  51 

Operation,  568-^6=94+4,  94+3=31-[-l,  64-1+4=10  re- 
mainder. 

Note  1. — If  there  is  a  remainder  in  the  first  operation, 
and  none  in  the  second,  it  is  the  true  remainder. 

2.  If  there  is  a  remainder  in  the  second  operation,  and 
none  in  the  first,,  the  product  of  this  remainder  into  the 
first  factor  used  is  the  true  remainder. 

3.  If  there  is  a  remainder  in  both  operations,  the  pro- 
duct of  the  last  remainder  into  the  first  divisor,  plus  the 
first  remainder,  will  be  the  true  remainder.  (See  the  opera- 
tion above.) 

IV.     Perform  tke  operations  hj  short  division,  when  practi- 

tahle. 

Note  1. — -It  is  generally  practicable  when  the  divisor  con- 
tains but  two  figures. 

Note  2. — If  the  divisor  is  a  composite  number,  proceed  as 
in  rule  III;  but,  if  a  prime  number,  proceed  as  if  it  were 
12  or  less. 

Ex.  Let  it  be  required  to  divide  3823  by  17. 

Operation,  17)3825 

225  Ans. 

Rem.  No  one  will  find  any  difficulty  in  operations  simi- 
lar to  the  preceding  one,  who  is  well  acquainted  with  the 
multiplication  table  extended;  and,  in  many  cases  time 
will  be  saved  by  dividing  by  the  entire  number,  even  when 
composite.  For  abridged  forms  of  operations  in  interest, 
iice  interest. 

PEUCENTAGE. 

LXIY.  Percentage  means  by  the  hundred,  and  is  applica- 
ble to  anything  reckoned  by  the  hundred. 

Percentage  may  be  divided  into  two  grand  divisions, 
viz :  percentage  without  time,  and  percentage  with  time. 
Both  these  taken  together  embrace  all  of  what  is  (Jailed  the 
business  part  of  Arithmetic. 

>  '  J  J  J       >  >        >   >  )     J  J  )               )          y  i  )          3 

^  ^     >  )         :>     •>  ,        '  J  J  J                  >    >        :>  '     -;  ^ ,    >  J  J  .     J 

'  ^   '  3        >    ■>  J          '  i  :>  :>  ,               '     i      :>  )'    '  ]  j  ;  J   j 

^  5  ^  :,     J      5  J        i  ,  ,  \      J     i   :i   :>     i  :,     \  '    i  )  .5  j>  3 

5  >  ^  J  -^      :>  )       >  )  }  .  ^  )  ^    J            J   3  J     ^  3  ^       -J  .  J     J  J        J    j 


52  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

LXy.  Percentage  without  time,  may  be  divided  into  two 
parts,  viz:  1st.  "Where  the  per  cent,  is  less  than  a  hundred 
(100,)  and  2d.  Where  more  than  a  hundred  (100.) 

1st.  Per  cent,  less  than  a  hundred  (100.) 

TERMS. 

Basis,  Bate  Per  Gent.,  Percentage,  the  Amount  and  Differ- 
ence. 

Note. — The  amount  and  difference  are  sometimes  called 
the  result  and  number. 

DEFINITIONS. 

1.  The  basis  is  the  standard  of  comparison,  and  repre- 
sents the  buying  price  or  cost  of  an  article. 

2.  The  rate  per  cent,  expresses  what  part  of  the  hundred 
is  to  be  taken,  e.  g.  six  per  cent,  is  six  of  a  hundred,  or 
six  hundredths. 

3.  Percentage  expresses  the  aggregate  amount  of  the 
part  of  each  100  contained  in  the  basis  as  indicated 
by  the  rate  per  cent. 

4.  The  amount  consists  of  the  bnsis-\-i\iQ  percentage,  and 
represents  the  selling  price  when  there  is  a  gain. 

5.  The  difference  consists  of  the  bans — the  percentage, 
and  represents  the  selling  price  when  there  is  a  loss. 

Note  1. — The  basis  as  the  standard  of  comparison,  is 
regarded  as  being  100  per  cent. 

Note  2. — Any  two  of  the  above  terms  being  given,  the 
third  can  be  found. 


AND   RAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  53 

THE  BASIS  AND  RATE    PER   CENT.  BEING   GIVEN  TO  FIND   THE 

PERCENTAGE. 

LXVI.  What  is  the  percentage  of  25  dollars,  rate  per 
cent.  20  ?     Ans.  $5. 

Analysis.  Now  since  the  rate  per  cent,  expresses  the  part 
to  be  taken  of  100,  20  must  be  taken  as  many  times  as  there 
are  hundred  in  ths  basis ;  then  20  must  be  taken  25  times, 
since  each  dollar  is  equal  to  100  cents;  thus,  25X30=5.00; 
hence  the  foUwing: 

Rule  I. — Multiply  the  iasis  fyy  the  rate  per  cent.^  and  cut  off 
according  to  the  rules  of  decimals. 

Ex.  What  is  the  percentage  of  $500  at  25  per  cent.  ? 

Operation,  500X25=:$125. 

Proof.  Divide  the  percentage  by  the  basis,  and  the 
quotient  will  be  the  rate  per  cent. ;  thus,  $125-;-$500==25 
rate  per  cent. 

Note  1. — The  reason  of  this  is,  the  per  centage  is  the  pro- 
duct of  the  basis  multiplied  by  the  rate  per  cent.,  and,  if 
we  divide  the  product  by  one  of  the  factors,  the  quotient 
iQUst  be  the  other. 

Note'^. — When  the  per  cent,  is  an  aliquot  part  of  100,  the 
operations  may  be  very  much  abridged  by  dividing  the 
basis  by  the  denominator  of  the  fraction  which,  in  effect, 
is  multiplication ;  thus,  25==i,  500Xi=125.  (See  table 
of  aliquot  parts.) 

Rem.  In  all  such  operations,  the  aliquot  part  of  100  will 
be  used  instead  of  the  decimal  expression,  when  practi- 
<;able. 

EXAMPLES   FOR    PRACTICE. 

1.     What  is  the  income  of  a  house  and  lot  worth   $23215, 
rented  at  15  per  cent  ? 
Ans.  $348.75. 


54  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINESS 

2.  In  an  orchard  containing  930  trees,  20  per  cent,  of 
tbem  being  pear  trees,  how  many  pear  trees  are  there? 

Ans.  186. 

3.  The  ornamental  work  of  a  certain  edifice,  worth 
$3325,  was  161  per  cent,  of  the  whole  cost;  what  is  the 
cost  of  the  ornamental  work? 

Ans.     $554,161. 

THE    RATE     PER    CENT.    AND    PEECENTAGE    BEING   GIVEN   TO 
FIND  THE  BASIS. 

LXYII.  Ex.  A  certain  traveler  paid  his  hotel  bill  with 
$1.75,  which  was  5  per  cent,  of  all  the  money  he  had;  how 
much  did  he  have? 

Ans.     $35.00. 

Analysis.     Now,    since   the   percentage  is    the  product 

arising  by  multiplying  the   basis   by  the  rate  per  cent.,  it 

folows,  as  the  per  cent,  is  one  factor,  that  if  we  divide  the 

percentage  by  the  rate  percent.,  the  quotient   will  be  the 

basis  ;  thus,  $1.75-^5=35  dollars;  hence  we  have 

Rule  II. — Make  the  decimal  places  in  the  dividend  and  divi- 
sor equal^  and  divide  the  percentage  hj  the  rate  per  cent.,  and, 
the  quotient  loill  l>e  the  hasis. 

Ex.  A  certain  drover  sold  200  head  of  hogs,   which  was 

20  per  cent,  of  his  entire  drove ;  how  many  did  he  have  ? 

Operation,  200-^^=1000  hogs. 

Wote. — As  the  rate  per  cent,  always  contains  two  decimal 
places,  if  there  are  no  decimal  places  in  the  percentage 
two  naughts  must  be  ai  .  oxed  to  make  the  decimal  places 
equal;  the  quotient  will  then  be  whole  numbers;  but,  if 
"the  rate  per  cent,  is  an  aliquot  part  of  a  hundred,  nO' 
naughts  need  be  annexed;  as  in  the  example  above. 

Proof.     Find  the  per  centage  on  the  basis  by  rule  I.,  and 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  55 

if  the  work  is   correct,    it   will  be  equal  to  the  given  per- 
centage; thus,  1000+.  20=200. 

EXAMPLES  TO  BE  SOLVED. 

1.  A  merchant  paid  out  850  dollars  for  groceries,  which 
was  25  per  cent,  of  his  capital ;  what  was  his  capital  ? 

Ans.    $3400. 

2.  A's  annual  income  is  $300,  his  rate  per  cent,  being. 
15.     His  capital  required  ? 

Ans.     32000. 

3.  A  certahi  farmer  sold  225  acres  of  land  which  was 
40  per  cent,  of  his  plantation ;  how  many  acres  did  he  still 
own? 

Ans.  3872  acres. 

THE  BASIS    AND    PERCENTAGE    GIVEN    TO  FIND   THE   RATE 

PER    CENT. 

LXVIII.  Ex.  A.  receives  $300  from  a  capital  of  $1200 ;; 
what  is  the  rate  per  cent.  ? 

Analysis.     Now,   since  $1200  produces  $800,  it  follows 

that  $1  will  produce  one  1200th   part   of   300;  thus,   SOO-f-. 

1200=j-J-J-o=i=25  per  cent. ;  hence  we  have  the  following 

Hide  HI. — Divide  the  percentage  hi/  tJie  dasis,  and  tlie  quo- 
tient reduced  to  a  decimal  will  he  the  rate  per  cent. 

Ex.  If  the  basis  be  225,  and  the  percentage  45;  what  is, 
the  rate  per  cent.  ? 

Operation,  45-^225=.£==^=20  per  cent. 

2.  A  farmer  owned  525  acres  of  land,  he  sold  320  acres ; 
what  per  cent  of  the  whole  does  he  still  own? 

Ans.  SOg'j  per  cent. 


56  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINESS 

3.  John  bouglit  a  knife  for  .75,  sold  it  and  made  15  cts. 
by  the  trade;  what  per  cent,  did  he  make? 
Ans.  20  per  cent. 

BASIS  AND  RATE  PER  CENT.  GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE  AMOUNT. 

LXIX.  Ex.  If  I  pay  $5  for  a  yard  of  broad  cloth;  what 
must  I  sell  it  for  to  make  20  per  cent.  ? 

Analysis.  Since  multiplying  the  basis  by  the  rate  per  ct., 
will  produce  the  percentage,  and  multiplying  any  number 
by  a  unit,  the  product  will  be  equal  to  that  number ;  it  fol- 
lows that,  if  we  multiply  the  basis  by  the  rate  per  cent.  -|-  a 
unit  (1),  the  product  will  be  the  amount ;  thus,  20  per  cent. 
==l  ©f  a  dollar  -f  1==^X$5=$6,  the  amount,  hence  we  have 
the  following. 

Bule  IV. — Multiply  the  hasis  dy  the  rate  pe?'  cent,  -f  1,  the 
product  will  ie  the  amount. 

Ex.  If  I  buy  calico  at  .10  per  yard^  what  must  I  sell  it 

for  per  yard  to  make  25  per  cent.  ? 

Solution.   (i+l)==fX10=4o=122-  cents,  the  amount. 

Note. — The  operation  may  be  performed  decimally  with 
the  same  result,  by  using  100  instead  of  1. 
Thus,  . 25+100=1. 25X10=.125=.12|  cents. 

THE  BASIS  AND  RATE  PER  CENT.   GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE  DIF- 
FERENCE. 

LXX.  Note. — The  operation  is  performed  precisely  as  in 
article  LXIX,  except  the  rate  per  cent,  subtracted  instead  of 
added;  hence  we  have  the  following, 

Rule  V. — Multiply  the  basis  by  1  minus  the  rate  per  cent.^ 
and  the  product  will  be  the  difference. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  57 

Ex.  If  I  pay  $5  for  an  article ;  what  must  I  sell  it  for, 

losing  20  per  cent.  ? 

Solution.  l=l—l=lX$5=U- 

Rem.  It  will  be  easily  perceived  that  5  bears  the  same  re- 
lation to  1,  that  20  does  to  100. 

2.  Bought  a  horse  for  $80,  but  finding  his  qualities  not 
good,  am  willing  to  lose  16fper  cent. ;  for  what  must  I  sell 
him? 

3.  Ans.  $66.66f  cents. 

3.  Bought  broad  cloth  for  $3  per  yard ;  finding  it  to  be 
damaged,  I  am  willing  to  lose  12^  per  cent. ;  the  selling 
price  required? 

Ans.  $2.62^. 

KNOWING  THE  AMOUNT  AND   RATE  PEE  CENT.  TO  FIND  THE 

BASIS. 

LXXT.  Wote. — ISTow  since  the  amount  consists  of  the 
"basis  -f  the  percentage,  it  follows  that  the  basis  must  con- 
sist of  the  amount  minus  the  percentage  of  the  basis,  con- 
sequently, if  we  divide  the  amount  by  the  rate  per  cent.  + 
a  unit  (1),  the  quotient  will  be  the  basis ;  hence  we  have 
the  following. 

Bule  VI.  — Divide  the  amount  hy  '[  -\-  tlie  rate  'per  cent,  or 
deciTnally  5y  100  +  tt^^  rate  per  cent..,  and  the  quotient  will  he 
the  hasis. 

Ex.  If  I  sell  a  cow  for  $32,  and  make  33 J  per  cent. ;  what 

did  she  cost  me?     Ans.  $24. 

Operation,  $32-1-3=24  dollars. 

Rem.  It  will  be  observed  that  rule  VI,  is  the  converse  of 
•rule  IV,  and  that  they  mutually  prove  each  other. 


58  THE   MA'N  OF   BUSINESS 

2.  Having  paid  24  dollars  for  a  cow,  what  must  I  sell  her 
for  to  make  33^  per  cent.  ?     Ans.  $32. 

3.  Having  paid  377  dollars  for  house  rent,  it  being  16 
per  cent,  more  than  I  paid  last  year ;  required  the  rent  f er 
last  year!  Ans.  325  dollars. 

4.  If  a  merchant  sell  calico  at  12^  cents  per  yard,  and 
makes  12 J  per  cent. ;  what  did  it  cost  per  yard?  Ans.  Hi 
cents. 

DIFFEKENCE  AND  RATE  PEK  CEI^T.  GIYEN  TO  FIND  THE  BASIS. 

LXXII.  J^oie. — The  difference,  as  we  have  seen,  consists 
of  the  basis — the  percentage;  it  follows,  therefore,  that 
the  basis  must  consist  of  the  difference,  plus  the  percent- 
age of  the  basis;  hence  we  have  the  following. 

Hule  VII.— Divide  the  difference  hj  the  unit  (1) — the  rate; 
the  quotient  icill  he  the  iasis. 

Ex.  If  a  merchant  sell  molasses  at  372^  cents  per  gallon, 
losing  6 J  per  cent. ;  required  the  cost  per  gallon?  Ans.  40 
cents. 

Operation,  37^-1-1 — 1\=40  cents. 

Proof,  40— 37i=2|^40=-,\  of  a  dollar=6i  cents. 

Rem.  Rule  VII  is  the  converse  of  rule  Y,  and  may  be 
proved  by  it. 

2.  Sold  a  horse  for  $80  per  cent.,  and  lost  8^  per  cent. ; 
required  the  cost?     Ans.  $87.27f,. 

THE  BASIS  AND  SESULTANT  NUMBER  GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE 
RA'.    '.  PER  CENT. 

LXXIII.  Ex.  If  I  pay  $75  for  a  horse,  and  sell  him  for 
100;  what  per  cent,  do  I  make? 

Analysis.     Now  since  I  sold  the  horse  for  $100  for  which 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALOULATOK.  5^ 

I  paid  $75,  it  follows  that  100—75=^25  the  sum  made;  now 
since  I  made  $525  on  $75.  I  can  only  make  one  75th  of  25 
on  one  dollar;  thus  25-:-75=^'J--=i-=33i  per  cent. ;  hence  we 
have.  ^ 

Buh  VIII. — Divide  the  difference  deUoeen  the  dasis  and  the 
resultant  number  hy  the  basis,  and  the  quotient  reduced  to  a  de- 
cimal will  be  the  rate  per  cent. 

Ex.  If  I  pay  $100  for  a  horse,  and  sell  him  for  $75 ;  what 
per  cent,  do  I  lose?     Ans.  25  per  cent. 

Operation,  100— 75=25-^100=/o^o=i=25  per  cent. 

EXAMPLES  FOR  SOLUTION. 

LXXIV.  If  I  pay  11  cents  per  yard  for  calico,  and  sell 
it  for  12 J  cents  per  yard;  what  per  cent  do  I  make?  Ans. 
13n  per  cent. 

2.  Bought  sheeting  at  14  cents  per  yard,  and  sold  it  at 
1C|- ;  required  the  rate  per  cent.  ?     Ans.  19  J  per  cent. 

Proof  by  rules  IV  and  V. 

Ex.  1.  If  I  sell  cloth  at  25  cents  per  yard,  which  c©st  3Gf 
cents;  what  per  cent,  do  I  lose?     Ans.  16f  per  cent. 

2.  Bought  cotton  for  20  cents  per  pound,  sold  it  for  22^ 
cents;  what  per  cent,  did  I  make?     Ans.  12}  per  cent. 

3.  A  boy  bought  an  orange  for  5  cents,  and  sold  it  for  6^ 
cents;  what  per  cent,  did  he  make?     Ans.   25  per  cent. 

TO  FIND  WHAT  PEE  CENT.   A  GIVEN  NUMBER  IS  OF  ANOTHER 
GIVEN  NUMBER, 

LXXY.     Ex.  What  per  cent,  is  2  of  5? 

Analysis.  The  number  proposed  as  the  per  cent,  of  an- 
other sustains  the  relation  to  that  number  as  the  percentage 
to  the  basis ;  thus,  2^5=5=40  per  cent.     (See  rule  III.) 


€0  THE  ma:n^  of  business 


PROBLEMS. 


1.  "What  per  cent,  is  9  of  27?     Aus.   33 J  per  cent. 

2.  What  per  cent,  is  i  of  5  ?     Ans.  621  per  cent. 

FORMULAS  OF  PERCENTAGE. 

LXXYI.     1.    The  percentage  =  the  dasis  X  ^^^  rate. 

2.  The  lasis  =  to  the  percentage  -^  the  rate. 

3.  The  rate  =  percentage -^  hase. 

4.  The  amount  =  the  iasis  X  <^  "^^^^  (1)  +  ^^^  ^^^^• 

5.  17ie  difference  ==  the  lasts  X  <^  '^^^^^  (1)  —  ^^^  ^^^^• 

6.  The  dasis  =  i^^e  amount  -i-  a  'wwi^  +  ^A*?  rate. 

7.  TAd  5a«i's  =  difference  -^  a  unit  (1)  —  the  rate. 

8.  TAe  rate  per  cent.  =the  difference  between  the  base  and 
resultant  number  ~  the  base. 

MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES. 

1.  In  a  certain  battle,  78  men  were  killed,  which  was  13j 
per  cent,  of  all  engaged;  required  the  number  engaged? 
Ans.  585  men. 

2.  If  I  sel]^^  of  an  article  for  as  much  as  I  paid  for  f  of 
it;  what  per  cent,  did  I  make?     Ans.   14,  per  cent. 

RATE   PER  CENT.   ABOVE  100. 

LXXVII.  I^ote.  — The  basis  being  the  standard  of  com- 
parison is  neither  more  not  less  than  100  per  cent. 

Now  since  multiplying  by  a  unit  (I)  the  product  is  equal 
to  the  multiplicand ;  then,  if  we  multiply  the  basis  by  (1), 
the  product  will  be  equal  to  100  per  cent.,  and,  if  by  2  the 
product  will  be  200  per  cent ;  hence  we  have  the  following. 


AND   RAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  61 

THE  BASIS  AND  BATE  PERCENT.  GIVEN  TO  FIND   PERCENTAGE. 

Rule  I.— Add  a  unit  for  every  additional  liundred^  and 
multiply  the  lasis  hy  the  amount,  and  the  product  wilfbe  the 
percentage. 

Ex.  Find  the  percentage  of  $25  at  200  per  cent. 

Operation,  $25X3=150,  the  percentage. 

Note  — If  the  per  cent  is  more  than  100  and  less  than  200, 
or  more  than  200  and  less  than  300,  reduce  the  part  of  a  lOO* 
to  a  fraction,  and  add  it  to  a  unit  or  units  as  the  case  may 
be,  and  multiply  as  before. 

Ex.  What  is  the  percentage  of  $25  at  150  per  cent? 

Operation,  50==14-1— UX$35=$37i 

THE   BASIS   AND   RATE   PER    CENT.  BEING  GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE 

AMOUNT. 

LXXyill.  Ex.  If  I  pay  $15  for  an  article,  what  must  I 
sell  it  for  to  make  200  per  cent.  ? 

Analysis.  Now  since  multiplying  the  basis  by  1,  the  pro- 
duct will  be  the  basis  and,  if  we  multiply  the  basis  by  2  the 
product  will  be  the  per  centage;  consequently,  if  we  nml- 
tiply  by  l-[-2=3,  the  product  must  be  the  amount;  tlms, 
$15X$3=|15,  the  amount;  hence  we  have. 

Rule  IT. — Adda  unit  for  each  hundred,  and  muMply  the 
hasis  l)y  the  sum  thus  found.,  and  the  product  will  he  the  amount, 

Ex.  If  I  pay  $32  for  an  article ;  what  must  I  sell  it  for, 

to  make  300  per  cent  ? 

Operation,  1+3=4X32=$128,  the  amount. 

THE  AMOUNT  AND  RATE  PER  CENT.   GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE  BASIS. 

LXXIX.  Ex.  If  I  sell  a  horse  for  $125,  and  make  100 
per  cent.,  what  did  he  cost  me? 


62  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINESS 

Analysis.  As  the  amount  consists  of  the  basis  +  the  per- 
centage ;  it  follows  that,  if  Ave  divide  the  amount  by  a  unit, 
-[- a  unit,  the  quotient  must  be  the  basis;  thus,  l-)-l=2; 
fl25-^2=$62.50;  hence  we  have. 

Bule  III. — Divide  the  amount  hy  a  unit  -\-  a  unit  or  frac- 
tions of  units  representing  the  rate  per  ceni.^  and  the  quotient 
will  le  the  hasis. 

Ex.  If  I  sell  an  article  for  $250,  and  make  125  per  cent ; 
what  did  it  cost  me?     Ans.  ^111 9. 

2.  What  is  the  percentage  on  3  of  a  dollar,  at  200  per 
cent.?     Ans.  $1. 

3.  What  is  the  amount  of  %\,  at  175  per  cent.?   Ans.  %\\. 

4.  If  I  sell  an  article  for  5  of  a  dollar,  and  make  115  J  per 
cent. ;   what  did  it  cost  me?     Ans.    g^. 

Note. — When  there  is  a  loss,  percentage  never  can  exceed 
100  percent. ;  since  it  is  impossible  to  lose  more  than  all; 
but,  when  there  is  a  gain,  it  may  exceed  100 ;  because  more 
than  100  per  cent,  can  be  made  on  a  100  (the  basis  being  re- 
garded as  100  per  cent.,)  it  may  be  doubled,  trebled,  and 
quadrupled,  &c. 

Rem.  Percentage  has  a  very  extensive  application  in 
mercantile  transactions,  and  also  in  the  ordinary  business 
of  life, 

PARTNERSHIP  OE  COMPANY  BUSINESS. 

LXXX.  1.  Partnership  is  as  an  association  of  two  or 
more  in  business  with  an  agreement  to  share  the  profits  or 
losses,  proportionate  to  each  one's  share  or  stock. 

2.  The  persons  thus  united  are  called  partners. 

3.  The  money,  property  or  labor  invested  in  trade  is  call- 
ed capital  or  stoch^  and  the  amount  v/hich  each  one  contri- 
butes is  called  his  share. 


AND   EAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  6'6 

4.  Profit  is  the  increase  of  capital  between  two  given 
dates. 

5.  Lossi^  the  decrease  of  capital  between  two  given  dates. 

6.  The  amount  apportioned  to  each  partner  is  called 
dividend. 

7.  The  assets  of  a  firm  are  its  cash  on  hand,  property  and 
all  debts  due  to  it. 

8.  The  liabilities  of  a  firm  embrace  all  the  debts  which  it 
owes,  and  all  its  endorsements. 

9.  The  firm  is  solvent  w^hen  its  assets  exceed  its  liabilities, 
and  insolvent  when  its  liabilities  exceed  the  cash  value  of 
its  assets. 

10.  When  the  capital  is  employed  for  an  equal  length  of 
time  or  when  no  time  is  specified,  it  is  sometimes  called 
simple  partnership ;  but,  when  the  periods  of  time  are  un- 
equal, it  is  generally  called  compound  partnership. 

Note. — It  will  readily  be  perceived  that  the  capital  or 
^tock  corresponds  to  the  basis  in  percentage,  and  the  gain 
or  loss  to  percentage,  and  that  each  partner's  share  is  a 
partial  basis ;  hence  we  have  the  following. 

liule  I. — Divide  the  gain  or  loss  by  the  capital,  and  multiply 
each  partner'' s  share  by  the  quotient^  and  the  product  ivill  be 
each  partner'' s  share  of  the  gain  or  loss,  respectively.  (See  rules 
I  and  III  in  per  centage.) 

Ex.  A  and  B  entered  into  partnership :  A  contributed 
-1180  and  B,  $140;  they  gained  $80.  What  is  the  gain  of 
each? 

Operation,    $18O+$140=32O.     $80^320=  3M=i. 

Again,  180Xi=45,    A's   share;    140Xi=35,   B's   share. 

Proof,  45+35=80. 

Note. — It  will  be  observed  that  the  loss  or  gain  divided 
by  the  capital  is  tlie  rate  per  cent. ;  consequently,    by  mul- 


<y4:  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

tiplying  eacli  partner's  capital,  the  product  will  be  the  per- 
centage respectively,  and  that  the  sum  of  these  several  pro- 
ducts, is  equal  to  the  given  gain  or  loss,  if  correct,  and 
that  this  result  is  the  proof  of  every  operation. 

Mte  2. — The  same  result  will  follow,  if  we  find  each 
partner's  fractional  part  of  making  such  share  the  numera- 
tor of  the  fraction,  and  the  entire  capital  the  denominator, 
and  multiply  each  one's  part  by  the  gain  or  loss. 

Ex.  A,  B  and  C  entered  into  partnership.  A  contributed 
^200,  B,  $300  and  C,  $400.  By  the  operation,  they  made 
$150.     Required  each  one's  share  of  the  gain? 

Operation,  200+300+400=900,  the  entire  capital.  200+ 
900=^,  A's  part  at  the  capital.  300-+900==B's  part.  400+- 
900=J=C's  part.  Again  9^X150=33^,  A's  share.  ^X150= 
50,  B's  share.  lX^bO=Q6^,  C's  share.  Proof,  33J+50+ 
661=150. 

PARTNERSHIP  WITH  UNEQUAL  TIME. 

LXXXI.  Note. — When  capital  is  invested  for  different 
periods  of  time,  the  gain  or  loss  is  not  only  proportionate 
to  the  amount  of  capital  contributed;  but,  also  to  the  time 
it  is  continued  in  trade;  hence,  to  find  each  partner's  gain 
or  loss,  we  have  the  following. 

Rule  IL — Multiply  each  partner's  capital  hy  the  time  U  is 
continued  in  trade,  and  then  proceed  as  in  rule  I. 

Ex.  A  and  B  formed  partnership :  A  put  in  $80  for  S 
months,  and  B,  $40  for  5  months.  By  the  operation  they 
lost  $50.     Required  the  loss  of  account? 

Operation,  80X3=240;  40X5=200;  240+200=440,  en- 
lire  capital.  50+440=/,X240=27,/i,  A's  share,  1^X200= 
22^^.     Proof,  27fi+228=50. 


AND   BAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  65 


PROBLEMS. 

1.  A  and  B  agree  to  raise  a  cotton  crop  jointly,  which 
they  are  to  divide  as  follows:  B  is  to  take  li  lbs.  as  often, 
as  A  takes  li  lbs. ;  what  part  of  the  crop  should  each  one 
elaim,  suppose  they  raise  7,000  lbs.,  what  will  be  the  share 
Hof  each?  Ans.  A's  part  f ;  B's,  ^;  A,  share  of  crop,  3,000 
lbs.  B's,  4,000  lbs.  As  the  solution  of  problems  like  the 
above  is  somewhat  peculiar,  a  brief  explanation  is  perhaps 

35     •      j_ 

needed.  The  sum  of  the  two  parts,  viz:  li+l|=-i2,  is  to 
be  regarded  as  the  basis,  but  each  part  taken  separately  is 
the  percentage,  and  the  quotient  of  each  part  divided  by 
the  sum  of  the  parts  as  the  rate  per  cent.  Thus  1^4-11= 
35.  ii_i-3i_3  A's:  !—3A's=*  B's  part. 

2.  C  and  D  together  raised  a  tobacco  crop=4, 200;  they 
agreed  to  divide  it  as  follows,  every  time  C  took  f  of  a  pound, 
D  took  li  pounds.  What  is  each  one's  part,  and  what  share 
«f  the  crop  should  each  one  claim?  Ans.  C's  |,  D's  |,  C's 
1,680  pounds,  D's  2,520  lbs. 

3.  One  of  the  stockholders  of  a  rail  road  company  owns 
18  shares  of  $50  each ;  the  dividend  is  declared  to  be  7i  per 
cent,  premium;  what  ought  he  to  receive?    Ans.  $67.50. 

BANKRUPTCY  OR  INSOLVENCY. 

LXXXn.  Bankruptcy  refers^to  business  failure,  and  in- 
ability  to  meet  pecuniary  liabilities. 

2.  A  bankrupt  is  one  who  fails  or  becomes  unable  to  pay 
his  debts. 

3.  An  assignee  is  a  person  selected  to  take  charge  of  the 

5 


66  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

property,   and  effects  of  a  bankrupt,  to  convert  the  same 

into  cash,  and  after  deducting  the  necessary  expenses  of 

settling,   to  divide  the  net  proceeds  as  the  law  requires 

among  the  creditors. 

Note. — The  net  proceeds  of  a  bankrupt  estate,  is  the  dif- 
ference between  the  available  assets,  and  the  necessary  ex- 
penses of  settling  the  estate;  hence,  for  the  solution  of 
problems  in  bankruptcy  we  have  the  following. 

Rule. — Divide  the  net  proceeds  by  the  amount  of  indehted- 
Tiess,  and  the  quotient  will  be  the  rate  per  cent,  on  each  dollar  ; 
then  each  man's  claim  being  multiplied  by  the  rate  per  ce^it,,  will 
yield  each  dividend  respectively. 

Ex.  A,  B  &  Co.  have  failed.  Their  indebtedness,  $3,000 ; 
their  assets  at  cash  value  $1,500;  the  expenses  of  settling, 
$500 ;  what  can  they  pay  on  the  dollar ;  and  what  will  D  re- 
ceive whose  claim  is  700  dollars?  Ans.  50  per  cent.  D  will 
receive  $350. 

Operation,  1,500— 500=1, 000-1-2, 000=^=50  per  cent. 
S700X50  per  cent.  =350,  D's  dividend. 

2.  C,  S  &  Co.  having  failed  in  business,  their  liabilities 
are  $63,500;  their  assets  have  a  cash  value  $52,384;  the  ex- 
penses of  settling  $1,584,  how  much  can  they  pay  on  the 
dollar,  and  what  dividend  should  J.  D.  receive  whose  claim 
is  $8,361.55.     Ans.  80  per  cent.    J.  D.  received  $8,689.24. 

ASSESSING   TAXES. 

LXXXIII.  A  tax  is  a  sum  of  money  assessed  by  the  gov- 
ernment on  individuals,  corporations,  societies,  districts, &c. 

2.  Taxes  for  government  purposes  are  imposed  on  prop- 
erty and  in  most  states  on  persons. 

3^  The  tax  imposed  on  persons  is  called  poll  or  capita- 
tion t«rX. 


AND   KAIL   ROAD   OALCULATOE.  G7 

4.  Immovable  property,  such  as  lands,  houses,  mills,  &c,, 
is  real  estate. 

5.  All  movable  property  of  whatever  kind  is  called  per- 
sonal property. 

6.  In  assessing  taxes,  the  first  thing  to  be  done  is,  to  take 
an  inventory  of  all  taxable  property  together  with  a  com- 
plete list  of  all  the  polls. 

7.  'The  amount  of  taxes,  assessed  on  any  state,  town  or 
corporation,  diminished  by  the  capitation  tax,  is  the  per- 
centage of  all  the  taxable  property ;  consequently,  the  value 
of  the  taxable  property  is  the  basis,  and  the  quotient  of  the 
percentage,  divided  by  the  basis  is  the  rate  per  cent. ;  then 
the  value  of  each  man's  property  multiplied  by  the  rate,  -[- 
Ms  poll  tax,  if  any,  will  be  his  tax ;  hence  we  have  the  fol- 
lowing 

Rule. — Subtract  the  poll  tax  from  the  a'inount  to  be  raised, 
divide  the  remainder  by  the  a'mount  of  taxable  property  by  the 
rate  per  cent. ,  thus  found.,  to  which  add  his  poll  tax,  if  any,, 
€ind.  the  result  will  be  the  tax  sought. 

Ex.  A  tax  of  six  hundred  dollars,  is  to  be  levied  on  a  cer- 
tain town  whose  taxable  property  is  valued  at  Si 00, 000 ;  there 

being  80  polls  at  $1.25  per  poll;  required  A's  tax,  who  owns 
^600  worth  of  taxable  property,  and  pays  one  poll. 

Operation,  80X^1. 25==$100;  $800— 100=$500-M100,OOa 
=.005  (5  mills).     800X5  mi.=$44-1.25==$5.25  A's  tax. 

2.  A  certain  town  is  to  be  taxed  $4,280;  the  property  on 
which  the  tax  is  to  be  levied,  is  valued  at  $1,000,000;  there 
are  200  polls  each  taxed  $1.40 ;  the  property  of  B,  is  valued 
at  $2,800,  and  he  pays  4  polls;  what  will  be  the  tax  on  each 
dollar,  and  what  will  be  B's  tax?  Ans.  4  mills  on  the  dol- 
lar; B'stax,  $16.80. 


68  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Note. — These  and  similar  operations  may  be  proved  by- 
subtracting  the  capitation  tax,  if  any,  from  the  tax  of  any 
individual ;  divide  the  tax  thus  found  by  the  number  rep- 
resenting the  value  of  his  taxable  property  which  will  give 
the  per  cent,  on  the  dollar — by  this  per  cent,  multiply  the 
number  representing  all  the  taxable  property,  and  the  pro- 
duct wall  be  equal  to  the  amount  to  be  raised  on  the  taxable 
property  of  any  given  town,  corporation,  or  state. 

Note  2. — When  a  tax  is  levied  on  personal  property,  it 
must  be  added  to  that  levied  on  real  estate. 

COMMISSION,  BROKERAGE  AND  STOCKS. 

LXXXIV.  Operations,  in  commission  and  brokerage,  arc 
substantially  the  same  ;  the  only  difference  is  the  former  is 
on  a  larger  scale  than  the  latter,  and  as  rules  have  already 
been  given  in  percentage  which  apply  to  every  case,  they 
need  not  be  repeated  here. 

COMMISSION. 

LXXXV.  Commission  is  an  allowance  made  to  an  agent 
for  the  purchase  or  sale  or  care  of  property. 

2.  This  agent  is  called  a  factor  or  correspondent  or  com- 
mission  merchant. 

3.  Commissions  are  estimated  at  so  much  per  cent,  on  the 
money  employed. 

4.  The  goods  sent,   are  called  a  consignment,  the  person 

who  sends  them  a  consignor,  and  the  person  to  whom  they 

are  sent,  is  sometimes  called  a  consignee. 

Note. — Since  the  rate  per  cent,  is  not  fixed  bylaw,  it  var- 
ies very  much  in  different  places ;  but  that  charged  on  real 
estate  is  generally  mucli^ess  than  that  on  goods. 


AND   EAIL   KOAD   CALCULATOR.  69 


BROKERAGE. 

LXXXVI.  Broherage  is  merely  the  commission  paid  to  a 
broker  or  dealer  in  stocks,  money  or  bills  of  exchange  for 
transacting  business. 

STOCKS. 

LXXXYII.  Stocks  are  government  funds,  stock  bonds, 
the  capital  of  banks,  insurance,  railroad,  and  manufactur- 
ing companies,  &c. 

2.  This  capital  or  money  paid  in,  is  divided  into  shares 
which  are  owned  by  stockholders. 

3.  The  original  cost  of  a  share  is  its  par  value. 

4.  If  it  sell  in  the  market  for  more  than  its  original  .cost, 
it  is  said  to  be  above  par  or  at  an  advance  ;  if  it  sell  for  less, 
it  is  below  par  or  at  a  discount. 

5.  The  original  cost  of  a  share  is  usually  100  dollars, 
though  it  is  sometimes  $25,  $50,  $500,  &c. 

6.  The  rise  or  fall  in  stocks  is  a  per  cent,  on  the  par  value. 
Thus  a  share  whose  par  value  is  ^  at  16  per  cent,  advance, 
will  bring  '^-^^  of  its  original  cost;  at  16  per  cent,  discount, 
will  bring  ^^  of  its  original  cost. 

7.  The  profits  of  thcbc  companies  are  every  year  or  every 
half  year,  divided  among  the  stockholders. 

8.  The  amount  so  paid  out  is  called  a  dividend. 

MISCELLANEOUS  EXAMPLES. 

LXXXVTII.  An  agent  having  sold  $6,000  worth  of  goods, 
his  commission  being  8j  per  cent. ;  what  amount  must  he 
remit  to  his  consignor?     Ans.  $5,500. 


70  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

2.  If  a  commission  merchant  sell  $6,000  worth  of  goods 
at  8^  per  cent. ;  how  much  ought  he  to  receive  for  the  sale? 

Ans.  $500. 

3.  A  consignee  has  received  $500  for  the  sale  of  goods, 
his  commission  being  8^  per  cent. ;  what  amount  of  goods 
did  he  sell?     Ans.  $6,000. 

4.  A  factor  sells  60  bales  of  cotton  at  $425  per  bale,  and 
is  to  receive  2i  per  cent,  commission ;  how  much  must  he 
pay  over  to  his  principal?     Ans.  24,862  50. 

5.  I  collect  for  A  $268.40,  and  have  5  per  cent,  commis- 
sion; how  much  do  I  pay  over?     Ans.  $254.98. 

6.  G  sends  $28,638.50,  to  his  broker,  to  be  invested  in 
bank  stocks  which  are  12|^  per  cent,  above  par,  for  which 
Ills  broker  is  to  receive  i  of  1  per  cent,  commission ;  how 
many  shares  of  $127  can  he  pay?     Ans.  200  shares. 

Solution.  12^+i=12f +100=1121;  $28,638.50+1121== 
25,400+127=200  shares. 

INSURANCE. 

LXXXIX.  Insurance  is  a  contract  by  which  an  indivi- 
dual or  company  binds  themselves  to  make  good  any  loss, 
damage  of  property  by  fire  or  storms  at  sea  or  other  casual- 
ties. 

2.  Ships  and  their  cargoes,  houses,  furniture,  cattle,  &c., 
are  insured. 

3.  Life  insurance  is  a  guaranty  for  the  payment  of  a  cer- 
tain sum  of  money  on  the  death  of  the  insured. 

4.  Health  insurance  secures  a  weekly  allowance  during  the 
sickness  of  the  insured. 

5.  This  assurance  is  affected  in  consideration  of  a  sum  of 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   OALCULATOE.  71 

money,  called  a  premium,  which  is  paid  before  hand,,  to  the 
insurers  or  underwriters. 

6.  This  written  agreement  of  indemnity,  is  called  a  policy. 

1.  The  premium  is  estimated  at  a  certain  rate  per  cent. . 
on  the  amount  insured. 

Ex.  Mr.  Russell  paid  $2,800  for  his  house  and  its  insur- 
ance ;  insurance  being  5  pesr  cent. ;  what  did  the  house  itself 
cost  him  and  what  did  he  pay  for  the  insurance?  Ans. 
$2,666.66f  cost  of  house.     $133. 33^  insurance. 

Solution.  5  per  cent.=i +g=|, ;  ^3,8O0-^|J=$2,666.66§ ; 
$2, 800—2, 666. 66f =$133. 33^. 

2.  A  insured  his  house  and  stock  of  goods  at  $5,000;  the 
rate  being  3  per  cent. ;  required  the  insurance  money? 
Ans.  $150. 

3.  An  insurance  of  $12,000  was  affected  on  a  ship  at  sea 
at  a  premium  of  2  per  cent. ;  what  did  the  premium 
amount  to? 

PROFIT  AND  LOSS. 

XC.  The  process  of  estimating  the  gains  and  losses  in 
trade  is  called  prq/lt  and  loss. 

2.  The  gain  or  loss  in  trade  is  either  the  increase  or  de- 
crease of  the  basis;  since  calculations  generally  proceed 
from  it. 

3.  Now  since  the  cost  of  an  article  is  the  basis,  and  the 
gain  or  loss  the  percentage,  it  follows  that  the  rules  which 
have  already  been  given  in  percentage,  apply  equally  well 
to  all  operations  in  profit  and  loss,  it  therefore  supercedes, 
the  necessity  of  their  repetition  here.  (See  rules  4  and  5^ 
9  and  7.) 


72  THE  mk.-N  OF  BUSI]N^EgS 

A  grocer  purchased  a  quantity  of  molasses  for  which  he 
paid  32  cents  per  gallon ;  what  must  he  sell  it  for  per  gal- 
lon to  make  33 J  per  cent.?     Ans.  43t. 

A  merchant  bought  a  quantity  of  broad  cloth  at  $4  per 
yard,  but  finding  it  some  what  damaged,  he  is  willing  to 
lose  8 J  per  cent. ;  the  selling  piice  required?    Ans.  $3.33j. 

EXCHANGE. 

XCI.     Exchange  is  the  method  of  transmitting  money 

from  one  place  to  another  by  means  of  bills  of  exchange. 

JVote. — When  the  places  designated  are  in  different  coun- 
tries, it  is  called  foreign  exchange ;  but  if  they  are  in  the 
same  country,  it  is  called  domestic  or  inland  exchange.  The 
limits  of  this  work  will  not  allow  us  to  do  more  than  to 
state  a  few  plain  facts  involved  in  the  latter. 

2.  Bills  of  exchange  also  called  drafts  or  checks,  are 
written  orders  for  the  payment  of  money. 

3.  A  sight  hill  is  one  payable  at  sight. 

4.  A  time  Mil  is  payable  at  a  specified  time  after  sight 
or  date. 

5.  The  signer  of  the  bill  is  the  maker  or  drawer. 

6.  The  one  to  whom  the  draft  is  addressed,  and  who  is 
requested  to  pay  it,  is  the  drawee. 

7.  The  one  to  whom  the  money  is  ordered  to  be  paid  is 
the  'payee. 

8.  The  one  who  has  possession  of  the  draft  is  called  the 
owner  or  holder.  When  he  sells  it,  and  becomes  an  endorser, 
he  is  liable  for  payment. 

9.  A  special  endorsement  is  an  order  to  pay  the  draft, 
to  a  particular  person  named,  who  is  called  endorsee^  and 
no   one   but   the   endorsee  can  collect  the  bill.     When  the 


AND   RAIL   KOAD   CALCULATOR.  73 

«ndoTsement  is  a  blank,  the  payee  merely  writes  his  name 
on  the  back,  and  any  one  who  has  lawful  possession  of  the 
draft  can  collect  it. 

10.  If  the  drawee  promises  to  pay  at  maturity,  he  writes 
across  the  isbce  the  word  accepted,  with  the  date,  and  signs  his 
name;  thus:  "Accepted  February  10th,  1873.    H.  Hint  on. '^ 

11.  The  acceptor  is  first  responsible  for  payment,  and  the 
draft  is  called  an  acceptance. 

12.  A  bill  of  exchange,  like  a  promissory  note,  may  be 
payable  to  order  or  dearer,  and  it  is  subject  to  protest  in 
case  the  payment  or  acceptance  is  refused.  It  is  generally 
subject  to  3  days  of  grace,  whether  a  sight  or  time  bill. 

THE  FORM  OF  AE   INLAND   DRAFT. 

XCIL     $1500.  Raleigh,  Feb.  10,  1873. 

Please  pay  at  sight  W.  and  D. ,  or  bearer,  fifteen  hundred 
dollars,  value  received,  and  charged. 

To  K.  and  C,  Brokers  in .  T.  A. 

Note. — The  face  of  the  bill  being  regarded  as  the  basis 
or  standard  of  comparison,  the  exchange  will  be  at  par,  a 
premium,  or  discount ;  hence  we  have  the  following  general 
rule: 

Represent  the  face  of  the  till  at  100  per  cent.,  and  then  pro- 
ceed according  to  rules  already  ginen  in  percentage,  as  the  na- 
ture of  the  case  may  require. 

BARTER. 

XCIII.  Bart&r  is  an  exchange  of  commodities — such,  for 
instance,  as  exchanging  grain,  butter,  eggs,  chickens,  and 
other  agricultural  products,  for  dry-goods,  groceries,  &c. 


74  THE   MAN   OF  BUSINESS 

GENERAL  RULE  OF   OPERATIOBT . 

XCIV.  Find  the  amount  of  the  commodity  to  he  exchanged^ 
at  the  given  pi'ice,  and  then  divide  the  amount  ty  a  number 
representing  the  price  of  a  concrete  unit  of  the  commodity  to  de 
exchanged,  and  the  quotient  will  he  the  number  of  yards^  pounds^ 
gallons,  &c.,  sought. 

Ex.  How  many  yards  of  calico  at  14  cents  per  yard 
should  a  lady  receive  for  22  pounds  of  butter  at  20  cents 
per  pound.     Ans.  81?. 

Operation,  22X. 20=4.40-^14=37^. 

Proof.  Estimate  the  number  of  yards  thus  found  by  the 
given  price,  and  the  result  will  be  equal  to  the  former ; 
thus,  31^  yards  at  14  cents  per  yard=$4.40. 

2.  How  many  gallons  of  molasses  at  40  cents  per  gallon 
«hould  a  farmer  receive  in  exchange  for  32  busheli  of  oats 
at  62^  cents  per  bushels?     Ans.  50  gallons. 

8.  How  many  yards  of  cassimere  at  $1.30  per  yard 
should  be  given  in  exchange  for  9  bushels  wheat  at  $3  per 
bushel?     Ans.  13  yds.  3  qrs.  1^  na. 

4.  How  many  pourds  of  sugar  at  15  cents  per  pound 
should  I  receive  for  12  dozen  of  eggs  at  18  cents  per 
dozen? 

5.  How  many  yards  of  broadcloth  at  $4  per  yard  ought 
I  to  receive  in  exchange  for  24  bushels  of  rye  at  80  cents 
per  bushel? 

6.  How  many  yards  of  sheeting  should  be  given  in  ex- 
change for  25  pounds  of  feathers  at  45  cents  for  pound? 

Note. — Questions  which  have  no  answers  annexed,  should 
1)G  proved. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  75 

CUSTOM  HOUSE  BUSINESS. 

XCV.  Duties  or  customs  are  the  toll,  tribute,  tariff  or 
taxes  payable  upon  merchandise  exported  and  imported. 

3.  These  duties  or  customs,  established  by  Congress  and 
collected  by  custom-house  officers  at  various  ports  of  entry, 
constitute  a  part  of  the  revenue  of  a  country. 

3.  Duties  are  either  specific  or  ad  xalorera. 

4.  A  specific  duty  is  a  fixed  sum  on  a  ton,  hundred  weighty 
hogshead,  gallon,  yard,  &c.,  without  regard  to  the  value 
of  the  commodity. 

5.  An  ad  valorem  duty  is  a  percentage  on  the  cost  of 
the  article  in  the  country  from  which  it  is  imported. 

6.  Gross  weight  i^  the  entire  weight  of  merchandise  with 
the  cask,  barrel,  bag,  &c.,  containing  it. 

7.  Net  iceigJit  is  the  weight  of  the  merchandise  after  all 
deductions. 

8.  Duties  are  computed  on  the  net  weight. 

9.  Lraft  is  an  allowance  for  w^aste. 

10.  Tare  is  an  allowance  for  the  weight  of  cask,  box, 
&c.,  deducted  after  the  draft. 

11.  Leakage  and  breakage  are  an  allowance  of  2  per 
cent,  for  the  waste  of  liquors  in  casks,  paying  duty  by  the 
gallon;  of  10  per  cent,  on  beer,  ale  and  porter  in  bottles, 
and  5  per  cent,  on  all  other  liquors  in  bottles.  The  follow- 
ing is  the  allowance  for  draft : 

On     112     lbs.  it  is 

From  112  to  224    lbs.  " 

"        224  to  336     "  " 

"        336  to  1120   "  " 

"      1120  to  2016   "  " 

Above             2016  ''  " 

Consequently  9  lbs.  is  the  greatest  draft  allowed. 


1 

lb. 

2 

lbs. 

3 

u 

4 

u 

7 

u 

9 

it 

76  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Note. — Though  not  mentioned  in  a  question,  dr^ft  or 
leakage  must  be  deducted  before  the  other  specific  allow- 
ance is  made. 

Note  2  — In  estimating  ad  valorem  duties,  no  deductions 
of  any  kind  are  made  where  there  is  actual  tare,  or  actual 
leakage  or  waste. 

Note"^. — Tare  is  of  three  kinds,  viz:  legal  tare,  or  such 
as  is  established  by  law ;  customary^  is  that  which  is  agreed 
upon  among  merchants;  actual  tare,  or  such  as  is  found  by 
actually  weighing  the  boxes,  bags,  &c.,  that  contain  the 
goods. 

Note  4. — Questions  in  custom-house  business,  are  solved 
by  rules  already  given  in  percentage. 

Ex.  What  will  be  the  duty  on  225  bags  of  coffee,  each 
weighing  gross  160  lbs.,  invoiced*  at  6  cents  per  lb.,  2  per 
cent,  being  the  legal  rate  of  tare,  20  per  cent,  the  duty? 
Ans.  $418,068. 

Operation,  160  pounds — 2  lbs.  ==158X325,  number  of  bags, 
35,550X6  cts.=2,]33.00X3  per  ct.=$42.66;  2,133.00—42. 
66=$2, 090. 34X30  per  ct.  ^418,068. 

2.  At  40  per  cent,  ad  valorem,  what  will  be  the  duty  on 
346  poundi  of  scM^ng  silk,  bought  at  Florence  at  $2.50  per 
pound,     Ans.  $346.00. 

3.  What  is  the  duty  on  150  bags  of  coffee,  each  weigh- 
ing 158  pounds,  invoiced  at  7  cents  per  pound,  the  tare 
being  4  per  cent,  and  duty  20  per  cent.  ? 

4.  What  is  the  duty  on  45  casks  of  wine,  of  36  gallons 
each,  invoiced  at  $1.25  per  gallon,  at  40  per  cent,  ad 
valorem? 


*  An  invoice  is  a  schedule  of   tlie  articles  imported,   together  with  the 
cost. 


AND   RAIL   KOAD    CALCULATOR.  IT 


PEECENTAGE   INVOLVING   TIME. 


XCVI.  Percentage  involving  time  embraces  interest  sim- 
ple and  compound,  true  discount,  bank  discount,  and 
equation  of  payments. 

SIMPLE    INTEREST. 

XCVII.      Terms — Principal,   Bate  per  cent.  Interest,   Time 

and  Amount. 

Rem. — Any  three  of  tliese  being  given,  the  fourth  may 
be  found. 

Dejinitions. — Interest   is   a  charge   made   for  the  use  of 

money. 

2.  The  principal  is  the  sum  on  which  the  interest  is 
computed,  and  corresponds  to  the  Ijaus  in  percentage  with- 
out time. 

3.  The  rate  'per  cent,  expresses  what  a  dollar  draws  in 
one  year. 

4.  The  interest  is  the  percentage  expressing  the  aggre- 
gate amount  of  the  several  parts  of  dollars  contained  in  the 
principal  as  indicated  by  the  rate  per  cent. 

5.  The  time  expresses  how  long  the  principal  has  to  run. 

6.  The  amount  consists  of  the  principal,  plus  the  in- 
terest. 

PRINCIPAL,  RATE  PER  CENT.,    AND   TIME  GIVEN   TO  FIND  THE. 

INTEREST. 

XCVIIL  Ex.  What  is  the  interest  of  |5,  at  6  per  cent., 
having  8  months  to  run?     Ans.    20  cents. 

Analysis.  Now,  since  the  rate  per  cent,  is  the  interest 
of  §1  or  100  cents  for   one  year  or   12   months,    it   follows 


78  THE   MAN   OP   BUSINESS 

that  the  rate  per  cent,  divided  by  12,  will  express  what  a 
dollar  draws  in  one  mouth ;  thus,  $6-;-12=^=i.  Again 
since  a  dollar  draws  2  cent  in  one  month,  5  dollars  must 
draw  5  times  ^;  thus,  ^X5="2-  Again,  since  5  dollars 
draw  in  one  month,  it  follows  that  it  will  draw  8  times 
that  in  8  months;  thus,  |;X8=^°==20  cents,  the  interest;  or 

it  may  be  briefly  stated  as  follows:  ^y(^i=l=J^==20  cents. 

Rem. — ^From  the  preceding  analysis,  a  rule  may  be  form- 
ed which  will  apply  to  every  case  in  which  the  interest  is 
sought,  except  when  time  is  expressed  in  days  only ;  hence 
we  have  the  following 

Rule. — Multiply  the  interest  of  one  dollar  for  one  month  Iry 
the  principal^  which  will  l)e  tlie  interest  for  one  month;  then 
multiply  this  interest  l>y  the  given  time  in  months,  and  the  'pro- 
duct will  5e  the  interest  sought. 

What  is  the  interest  of  $24.64  at  8  percent.,  having  9 
months  to  run?     Ans.  .11.4784. 

Operation,  fX34.64=16.42fX9=|1.4784.  This  and  sim- 
ilar operations  may  be  proved  by  dividing  the  interest  by 
the  time,  and  multiplying  the  quotient  by  12,  and  dividing 
by  the  rate  per  cent. ;  thus,  $1.4784X9=16.42fX12==$l.- 
9762-^8=^24.64,  the  proof. 

Rem.  The  reason  of  this  operation  will  be  given  here- 
after. 

3.  What  is  the  interest  of  $20  at  10  per  cent,  having  1 
year  and  8  months  to  run?    Ans.  $53. 33 J. 

Operation.  -5+20=^X20  mo.='-^"=$3.33J. 

3.  What  is  the  interest  of  $9  at  6  per  cent,  having  7 

months  and  15  days  to  run?     Ans.  33 1  cents. 

Note. — When  days  occur,  reduce  them  to  the  fraction  of 
a  month,  and  proceed  as  directed  in  the  rule. 


AND  RAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR. 


79 


Rem,  In  order  to  facilitate  operations,  a  table  exhibiting 
Tvhat  $1  will  draw  in  one  month,  from  1  to  12  per  cent,  is 
given  below.  The  first  column  represents  the  rate  per  cent. , 
the  second  a  common  fraction  of  equal  value,  and  the  third 
fractions  in  their  lowest  terms. 


Rate. 

Common  fraction. 

Lowest  Terms 

1 

1                    - 

12 

=                    1 

12 

2               ' 

I                                 2                              I 
12 

'                    1 

S               ' 

'                                  3                              ' 
12 

«                  1 

4 

4 

{                                  4                              <■ 

'                             1 

12 

3" 

4i 

i                                 9                              i 

t                              3 

24: 

¥ 

5               ' 

'5                              < 
12 

<                              5 
12" 

6               * 

t                                  6                              i 

'                             1 

12 

2~ 

7i 

'                                 15                             ( 

'                  .             5 

24 

¥ 

7 

«                                  7                              c 

<                             7 

12 

12 

8               ' 

i                                 8                              « 

'                             2 

12 

"3 

9               ' 

'                                  9                              I 

'                             3 

12 

T 

10 

'                                10                           i 

'                              5 

12' 

"6 

11               ' 

«                                 11                             i 

<■                           11 

12 

12 

13 

<                                 12                             < 
12 

'                               1 

Note. — When  the  time  is  expressed  in  years  only,  the 
operations  may  be  sometimes  facilitated  by  multiplying  the 
principal  by  the  rate  per  cent.,  which  will  give  the  interest 


80  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

for  one  year,  and  this  interest  multiplied  by  the  number  of 
years,  will  give  the  interest  sought. 

Ex.  Required  the  interest  of  $35.25  for  3  years,  at  7  per 
cent.?     Ans.  $7.4025. 

Operation,  $35.25X7  per  cent.=|2.4675X3  per  cent.= 
$7.4025. 

EXAMPLES  FOE,  PRACTICE. 

XCIX.  1.  Find  the  interest  on  $24.15  for  10  months  at 
6  per  cent. 

2.  What  is  the  interest  of  $2.10,  having  30  months  and 
20  days  to  run,  at  10  per  cent? 

3.  Required  the  interest  of  $125  for  6  months  and  10  days, 
at  8  per  cent.  ? 

4.  What  is  the  interest  of  $42.35,  having  4  years  to  run, 
at  6  per  cent.  ? 

C.      When  the  principal  consists  of  cents  only  or 

CENTS  AND  MILLS. 

The  operation  may  he  performed  hy  reducing  the  cents  or 
cents  and  mills  to  the  fraction  of  a  dollar;  and,  proceeding  ac- 
cording to  the  rule  already  given,  or  hy  finding  the  interest  on 
one  cent  for  one  month  or  one  year  as  the  case  may  ie,  and  mul- 
tiplying the  interest  thus  found  hy  the  time. 

Ex.  What  is  the  interest  of  2  cents,  and  5  mills  equal  to 
Sj  cents  at  6  per  cent.,  having  8  years  and  4  months  to  run? 

Solution.  Now,  since  $1  draws  h  a  cent  in  one  month, 
one  cent  will  only  draw  ^J^  part  of  k\  thus  2-^100=^;  if 
one  cent  will  draw  ^l^,  ^l  cents  will  draw  22  times  that; 
4-^^i=M^L'>  ^^^?  if  ^2  cents  draw  one  ij  in  month,  it  wHl 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  81 

drawlOOtimes  that  in  100  months;  l^'X100=-^=.^^=li  cts., 
answer. 

Briefly,  thus,  ^-rl00X22=^i,=^uX8  years  and  4  months= 
^,^=li  cents. 

CI.     When  the  time  is  expressed  in  days  only. 

Rem.  In  computing  interest,  business  men  generally  as- 
sume 12  calendar  months  for  a  year,  and  30  days  for  a 
month ;  but,  as  there  are  7  months  which  have  31  days  each^ 
and  4  months  which  have  30  days  and  one  having  but  28, 
the  interest  will  generally  be  a  little  too  small,  and  possibly 
sometimes  a  little  too  large ;  but  the  error  in  any  case  will 
be  very  slight;  in  consequence,  of  this,  however,  some  bank- 
ing corporations  express  the  time  of  their  bonds  in  days 
only,  and,  as  we  are  not  allowed,  in  such  cases  to  assume 
30  days  for  a  month,  the  following  method  has  been  devised. 

Hule. — Find  the  interest  for  one  year,  and,  then  divide  this 
interest  hy  365,  (disregarding  the  odd  hou7's),  and  the  quotient 
will  ie  the  interest  for  one  day;  multiply  the  quotient  hy  the 
number  of  days  specified,  and  the  product  will  Tje  the  interest 
sought. 

Ex.  What  is  the  interest  of  ^500  at  6  per  cent.,  having 

62  days  to  run?     Ans.  $5,095. 

Operation.    $500X6=$30  interest  for  one  year;  $30.00-f- 

365=.08l3X63  days=$5.095. 

Cn.     Method  op  computing  interest  on  English  cur- 

RENCY. 

Note. — As  it  is  sometimes  expedient  to  calculate  interest 
on  English  currency,  and  as  questions  of  this  kind  are  gen- 
erally found  in  most  Arithmetics  now  in  use,  a  short  and 
accurate  method  of  calculating  the  interest  on  this  cur- 
rency, is  desirable.  Operations  of  this  kind  may  be  per- 
formed in  a  way  similar  to  that  which  has  already  been 
6 


82  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

given,  viz :  after  reducing  the  given  denominations  to  the 
fraction  of  a  pound. 

Multiply  the  principal  ly  what  one  pound  will  draw  in  one 
month,  and  this  product  hy  the  number  of  months,  and  the  re- 
■suU  will  de  the  intei'est  sought  in  shillings. 

Ex.  Kequired  th®  interest  on  £  30,  at  6  per  cent,  for  5 
months. 

Operation  [^  of  a  shillingX£  30=^^=3s.>  5=15s.  interest. 

Eem.  In  the  following  table  will  be  found  what  one 
pound  will  draw  in  one  month,  from  1  to  12  per  cent. : 


TABLE. 

Rate  per  cent. 

Part  of  a  shilling. 

Lowest  terms'. 

1 

= 

1 

60 

= 

1 

CO 

2 

u 

2 
60 

it 

1 

30 

3 

(( 

3 

60 

ti  . 

1 

lo 

4 

il 

4 
60 

i( 

1 
15 

5 

u 

5 

60 

(C 

1 
12 

6 

(( 

6 
60 

u 

1 

10 

7 

i; 

7 
60 

(( 

7 
60 

8 

(( 

8 
60 

(k 

2 

15 

9 

a 

9 
60 

u 

3 

30 

10 

(( 

10 
60 

u 

1 
6~ 

11 

a 

11 
60 

u 

11 
60 

13 

% 

12 
60 

4( 

1 

AND   KAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  83 

Note. — By  using  the  above  table,  operations  in  English 
money  will  be  almost  as  simple  and  easy  as  those  in  United 
States  currency. 

EXAMPLES  FOR  PRACTICE. 

CIL  1.  What  is  the  interest  on  £144  for  6  months  and  20 
days,  at  5  per  cent.  ?     Ans.  £4. 

2.  Required  the  interest  on  15s.  for  2  years  and  6  months, 
at  6 per  cent.?     Ans.  2s.  3d. 

3.  "What  is  the  interest  on  12s.  6d.  for  1  year  and  3 
months,  at  6  per  cent.  ?     Ans.   11  id. 

CIII.     Interest,  Rate  per  cent,  and  time   given  to 

FIND  the  principal. 

Ex.  20  cents  being  the  interest,  6  per  cent,  the  rate,  8 
months  the  time ;  required  the  principal. 

Analysis,  20-:-8==2i  interest  for  1  month,  2i=^X12=3a 
cents,  interest  for  one  year ;  now,  since  the  interest  of  any 
given  principal,  multiplied  by  the  rate  per  cent.,  will  give 
the  interest  for  one  year,  it  follows  that,  if  we  divide  the 
interest  of  one  year  by  the  rate,  the  quotient  will  be  the 
principal ;  thus,  30-;-6==$5,  the  principal.  Hence  we  have 
the  following 

Rule. — Divide  the  given  interest  hy  the  time  in  months,  mul- 
tiply the  quotient  Ijy  1 2,  divide  the  product  hy  the  rate  per  cent. 
and  the  qvMient  will  he  the  principal. 

Note — If  the  time  is  expressed  in  years  only,  multiplying- 
by  12  should  be  dispensed  with. 

Note  2. — Operations,  under  this  rule,  are  proved  by  cast- 
ing the  interest  on  the  principal,  which,  if  correct  will  be 
equal  to  the  given  interest. 


84  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

CIV.     The  principal,    interest  and  rate  per  cent, 

GIVEN  to  find  the  TIME. 

* 

Ex.  Let  the  principal  be  $12,  the  interest  60  cents,  the 
rate  6  per  cent. ;  required  the  time. 

Analysis.  Now,  since  $12  has  drawn  60  cents,  it  is  evi- 
dent that  $1  will  only  draw  ,'2  of  60  cents;  thus,  60-f-12=5; 
now,  since  $1  has  drawn  5  cents,  and  that  $1,  at  6  per  cent, 
will  draw  ^  cent  in  one  mo.  ;it  follows  that  as  often  as  5  con- 
tains hy  must  be  the  time  in  months ;  thus,  5^2==-10  months, 
time  sought.     Hence  we  have  the  following 

Rule. — Divide  the  interest  hy  the  principal,  and  the  quotient 
l>y  what  one  dollar  loill  draw  in  one  mo7ith  at  the  given  rate^ 
and  the  result  will  de  the  time  in  months  required. 

Ex.  The  principal  being  S40,  the  interest  ^1.60,  and  the 

rate  8  per  cent.     What  is  the  time?     Ans.  6  months. 

Operation,  $1.60-^-40=4  cents;  4-^1=6  months. 

CV.     The  principal,  interest  and  time  being  given 

TO  FIND  THE  RATE  PER  CENT. 

Ex.  Let  $10  be  the  principal,  40  cents  the  interest  and. 
the  time  8  months. 

Analysis.  $1  will  draw  one-tenth  of  the  interest ;  hence,, 

40-^-10=4  cents;  now,  since  $1  has  drawn 4  cents  in  8  mo., 

it  can  only  draw  -^  of  4  in  1  month  ;  thus,  4-^8=*=^ ;  now,, 

since  J  expresses  what  $1  has  drawn  in  one  month,  it  will 

draw  12  times  ^  in  12  months;  thus,  ^y(12='^^=G,  the  rate. 

Hence  we  have  the  following 

Mule. — Divide  the  interest  Tjy  the  principal  and  the  quotient 
'by  the  time,  and  multiply  the  last  quotient  &y  1 2,  and  the  pro- 
duct will  be  the  rate  sought. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD    CALCULATOR.  85 

Ex.  Let  the  principal  be  $40,  interest  $1.60,  time  6  mo.  ; 
required  the  rate.     Ans.   8  per  cent. 

Operation,  .|1.60-f-$40=4  cents.  4:^Q=IX12=^^=S  per 
cent. 

Wote  1. — It  will  be  observed  that  this  operation  proves 
the  example  under  the  next  preceding  rule. 

JSfote  2. — Most  states  have  established  a  certain  rate  per 
cent,  by  law;  this  is  called  legal  or  lawful  interest. 

PABTIAL  PAYMENTS. 

CVI.  Partial  pnyments  are  parts  of  a  note  or  bond  paid  at 
different  times,  and  endorsed  upon  its  back.  The  princi- 
ples involved  in  computing  the  interest  on  partial  payments, 
make  it  convenient  to  divide  the  rule  adopted  by  the  Sup- 
reme Court  of  the  United  States,  and  most  of  the  States  in- 
to two  parts  or  two  rules. 

WHEN  THE  PAYMENT  OR  PAYMENTS  EXCEED  THE  INTEREST. 

CVII.  Rule  I. — Compute  the  interest  on  tJie  principal,  from 
the  date  of  the  note  to  the  date  of  the  first  payment,  and  then 
from  the  amount,  suMract  the  payment,  and  the  difference  will 
he  the  new  principal;  continue  the  operation  in  a  similar  way, 
till  theMme  of  settlement,  and  the  last  amount  will  he  what  re- 
m.ains  due. 

WHEN  THE   INTEREST  EXCEEDS  THE  PAYMENT. 

CYIII.     Ride. — Compute  the  interest  as  lief  ore,  hut  pay  no 
attention  to  the  pjayment,    till  the  second  payment  is  reached, 
and  then  if  the  sum  of  the  payments  exceed  the  interest;  from. 
the  amount,  subtract  the  amount  of  the  payment,  and  tlie  dif- 
ference wi/l  constitute  a  neiD  principal  with  which  proceed  as  be- 
fore, till  the  time  of  settlement  he  reached. 

Ex.   On   a  certain  note   dated  January  1st,  1870,  whose 


86  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

face  calls  for  $20,  with  interest,  at  6  per  cent.,  having  12 
months  to  run,  were  endorsed  the  following  payments:- 
April  1st,  1870,  $8.  On  August  1st,  1870,  $5.  On  the  first 
of  November,  1870,  $4.  What  will  remain  due  January  1st, 
1871? 

Operation,  $20X1=10  cts.XB  months=30+$20=$20.30, 
the  amount— $8=$12. 30,  second  principal;  $12.30Xi= 
.615X4  months=.246+$12. 30=112.546— $5=17.546,  third 
principal;  $7.546X2=.3773X3  months==$113;  7.543+.113 
=$7.659— $4.=$3.659,  fourth  principal;  $3.659X'i= 
. 01829 JX3  months=.  036;  $3.6o9+.036=$3.695+,  answer. 

The  following  symbolic  formulas  will  perhaps  afford  some 
aid  in  understanding  the  above  rules.  Let  P  symbolize 
the  first  principal ;  the  figured  P's,  the  consecutive  princi- 
pals respectively;  I,  the  interest,  and  A,  B,  C,  D,  &c.,  the 
several  payments. 

FORMULAS. 

CIX.  I.  P+I— A=2P;  2P4-J— B=3P;  3PXJ— C= 
4P ;  4P-|- J==to  the  sum  due  at  the  time  of  settlement. 

II.  P+J— A+B=2P;  2P+J— C+D=3P;  3P;j-J=to 
the  sum  due. 

Note  1. — It  will  often  happen  in  the  same  operation  that 
both  parts  of  the  rule  will  have  to  be  applied. 

Note2i. — The  number  of  letters  symbolizing  the  endorse- 
ments on  a  note,  must  vary  with  the  number  of  payments. 

Note  3. — In  order  to  insure  accuracy  in  the  operations,  it 
would  be  well  to  prove  each  partial  operation  before  form- 
ing a  new  principal. 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  S2 


COMPOUND   IKTEKEST. 

CX,  Compound  interest  is  the  interest  computed  on- 
the  amount;  i.  e.,  every  successive  amount  becomes  a  new 
principal,  and  the  number  of  principals  thus  found,  will. 
depend  on  the  number  of  intervals  involved  in  the  time 
which  the  note  or  bond  has  been  on  interest. 

The  length  of  time  which  a  note  has  to  run  before  the 
interest  is  added,  and  a  new  i)rincipal  formed,  will  depend 
on  the  time  stipulated  by  the  parties  concerned. 

When  the  interest  is  added  at  the  end  of  each  year,  it  is 
said  to  compound  annually,  and  when  it  is  added  at  the 
end  of  each  half  year,  it  is  said  to  compound  semi-annur 
ally,  etc. 

TO  FIND  COMPOUND  TNTEEEST. 

CXI.  Rule. — Find  the  interest  on  the  principal,  as  in  sim- 
ple interest;  add  the  interest  thus  found  to  the  principal ;  on 
this  Oj-mount  proceed  as  l)efore  ;  and  from  the  last  amount  sub- 
tract the  given  principal,  and  the  difference  will  do  the  com- 
poundinterest  sought. 

Ex.  What  is  the  compound  interest  on  $300  for  3 
years  at  6  per  cent.  ? 

Operation,     $300X6=$18.00-f  |300.00=$318.00,     second 

principal;  |318X6=S337.08,  third  principal ;  $337.08X<3= 

$20. 2248+337. 08=-$357. 3048,    amount   for  3  years;  ^357.- 

3048— $300. 00=-$57. 3048,  answer. 

Note  1. — When  partial  payments  have  been  made  on 
notes  at  compound  interest,  it  is  customary  to  Jind  the 
amount  of  the  giten  principal,  and  from  it  to  subtract  the  sum 
of  the  several  amounts  of  the  endorsements. 


88  THE   MAN^   OF   BUSINESS' 

Note  ^, — ^Though  compound  interest  is  nr^^t  geneTaliy 
favored  by  the  law,  it  is  not  usurious.  A  contract  or 
promise  to  pay  money  with  compound  interest  caffiSiot  gen- 
erally be  enforced,  being  only  valid  for  the  principal  and 
legal  interest.  In  this  State,  however,  the  money  of  wa^rds^ 
is  allowed  to  draw  compound  interest. 

EXAMPLES. 

CXII.  1.  What  is  the  amount  of  $100  at  6  per  cent,  per 
annum,  compound  interest,  for  ten  years,  the  interest  be- 
ing payable  semi-annually?     Ans.  ^112.55. 

2.  What  is  the  compound  interest  on  $G30  for  four  years 

at  5  per  cent.?     Ans.  $135,769. 

Note. — Operations  in  compound  interest  are  proved  by 
dividing  the  amount  by  the  amount  of  one  dollar  for  the 
given  time  and  rate,  and,  if  correct,  the  quotient  will  be 
the  first  principal. 

TRUE   DISCOUNT. 

CXIII.  Discount  is  an  allowance  made  for  the  payment 
of  money  before  it  becomes  due. 

There  are  three  things  involved  in  discount,  viz :  the 
face  of  the  note,  the  present  worth,  and  the  discount. 

The  face  of  the  note  is  the  amount  specified  in  the  note. 

The  present  worth  is  what  the  face  of  the  note  is  worth 
at  present  in  cash,  and  is  the  difference  between  the  face 
and  its  discount. 

The  discount  is   the  difference  between  the  face  of  the 

note  and  its  present  worth. 

Note. — The  simple  interest  on  the  face  of  the  note  is  not 
its  true  discount.  Simple  interest  expresses  the  fractional 
part  of  the  principal  indicated  by  the  rate  per  cent.,  the 


AND   KAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  89 

rate  being  the  numerator,  and  100  being  the  denomiTiator, 
as  --;  but  the  discount  expresses  the  fractional  part  of  the 
face  of  the  note,  as  indicated  by  the  rate  per  cent. ;  but 
the  denominator  of  the  fraction  is  lOO+therate  thus,  — . 

THE  FACE  OP   THE    NOTE,    IIA.TE,     AND    TIME   GIVEN    TO    FIND 
THE   PRESENT  WORTH. 

CXIV,  Ex.  What  is  the  present  worth  of  $2^4,  having 
2  years  to  run,  at  6  per  cent.  ? 

Now,  since  the  present  worth  expresses  the  present  -value 

of  the  face  of  the  note,  it  follows  that  the  face  of  the  note 

divided   by   $1,    its  interest  for  the  given  rate  and  time, 

must  give  $1  of  present  worth  for  each  time  it  is  contained 

in  the  face  of  the  note;  thus,  S224^($l-f  12  cts.)=^3(0.00; 

hence  we  have  the  following 

Rule. — Divide  the  face  of  the  note  ty  the  amount  of  Si  for 
the  given  rate  and  time,  and  the  quotient  will  he  the  present 
worth. 

Ex.  What  is  the  present  worth  of  $327.00,  having  1  year 

and  8  months  to  run,  at  6  per  cent.  ? 

Operation,  ^327.00-^1.09,  (the  amount  on  $l)=$300.00ans. 

Note. — The  discount  is  found  by  subtracting  the  present 
"Vforth  from  the  face  of  the  note;  thus,  as  in  the  example 
of  the  above:  $327.00  (face  of  the  note,)— $300.00  (present 
worth)  =^27  (discount.) 

EXAMPLES  FOR  PRACTICE. 

CXV.  What  is  the  discount  on  $75.50  for  2  years,  6 
months,  at  8  per  cent.?     Ans.  .'■fl2.58^. 

What  is  the  discount  on  $100.00,  due  6  months  hence,  at  6 
percent.?     Ans.  ^2.913. 


^0  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

I  bought  a  bill  of  goods  on  6  months'  credit,  amountiiag 
to  $973.50;  how  much  ought  to  be  deducted  if  cash  is  paid 
at  the  time  of  receiving  the  goods,  interest  being  6  per 
cent.?     Ans.  $28.35. 

•  "What  is  the  present  worth  of   $940.00,  having  6  monthi 
to  run,  at  6  per  cent.  ? 

THE  PRESENT  WORTH,  RATE,  AKD  TIME  GIVEN  TO  FIND 

THE  FACE. 

CXVI.  Rule.  —  Compute  the  interest  on  the  present  worth 
at  the  given  rate  and  time,  add  the  interest  to  the  present  worth, 
and  the  amount  will  te  equal  to  the  face  of  the  note. 

Ex,  The  present  worth  of  a  certain  note  of  $200.00,  the 
time  2  years,  and  the  rate  6  per  cent. ;  required,  the  face  of 
the  note.     Ans.  $2S4.00. 

Operation,  $200X6=$12X3  yrs.=$24X$200=-$324.00. 

Note. — This  operation  is  the  proof  of  the  next  preceding 
rule. 

BANK   DISCOUNT. 

CXVII.  Bank  discount  differs  ixoxritrue  discount  in  this 
particular:  in  the  former,  interest  is  computed  on  the  face 
of  the  note,  and  in  the  latter,  on  the  present  worth  or  value. 

TO   FIND   BANK  DISCOUNT. 

CXVIII.  Rule. — Add  3  days.,  called  days  of  grace.,  to  the 
time  the  note  has  to  run.,  then  compute  as  in  simple  interest., 
and  the  interest  thus  found  will  he  the  discount  sought. 

Note. — The  difference  between  the  face  of  the  note  and 
the  discount  '\%  Q,QX\.Q,^i\iQ  present  worth  ov proceeds. 

Ex.  Find  the  bank  discount  on  $150  for  six  months,  at 

6  per  cent.     Ans.  $4,575. 

Operation,  $150X^='3'5X6^  months— $4,575. 


AND   BAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  91 

2.  If  I  deposit  a  note  of  $600  in  bank,  discounted  at  6 
per  cent.,  what  sum  ought  I  to  receive?     Ans.  $590.70. 

3.  Find  the  bank  discount  of  $375  for  3  months  and  9 
days,  at  7  per  cent.     Ans.  $7,438. 

4.  A  note  for  $1800,  payable  in  60  days,  was  discounted 
at  a  bank,  at  6  per  cent.,  what  was  received  for  the  note  ?' 
Ans.  $1781.10. 

5.  What  is  the  bank  discount  of  $300,  discounted  at  10" 
per  cent.  ? 

TO  FIND  THE  PACE  OF  A  NOTE. 

CXIX.  Rule. — Divide  the  present  worth  or  proceeds  % 
the  present  worth  of  one  dollar  for  the  given  rate  and  time,  and 
the  quotient  will  ie  the  face  of  the  note. 

Ex.  I  wish  to  borrow  $590.70,  discounted  at  6  per  cent. : 
required  the  face  of  the  note  to  be  deposited.     Ans,  $600. 

Note. — It  will  readily  be  perceived  that  this  and  the  next 
preceding  rule  mutually  prove  each  other. 

2.  If  I  receive  $550,  discount  being  at  10  per  cent., 
what  is  the  face  of  the  note  ? 

EQUATION  OF  PAYMENTS. 

CXX.  Equation  of  payments  is  a  process  by  which  we 
ascertain  the  average  time  for  payments  of  several  sums,, 
due  at  different  times. 

Suppose  I  owe  $1000,  of  which  $100  are  due  in  two 
montha,  $250  in  four  months,  $350  in  6  months,  and  1300 
in  9  months.  If  I  pay  the  whole  sum  at  once,  how  many 
months' credit  ought  I  to  have? 

Analysis.     A  credit  on  $100  for  2  months  is  the  same  as 


92  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

a  credit  on  $1  for  200  months ;  thus,  $100X3  months=200 
months.  A  credit  on  $250  for  4  months  is  the  same  as  a 
credit  on  $1  for  a  thousand  months;  thus,  $250X4  months 
=1000  months.  A  credit  on  $350  for  6  aconths  is  the  same 
as  a  credit  on  ^1  for  2100  months;  thus,  $350X6  months 
=2100  months.  A  credit  on  $300  for  9  months  is  the  same 
as  a  credit  on  II  for  2700  months;  thus,  $300X9  months 
=2700  months.  $100+$2504-$350-f =$1000.  200  months 
+1000  months+2100  months+2700  months=6000  months. 
Hence  I  ought  to  have  the  same  as  a  credit  on  $1  for  &000 
months;  but,  if  I  wish  a  credit  on  $1000  instead  of  II,  it 
is  evidently  to   be   for  only  — -  of  6000  months,  which  is 

6  months ;  hence  we  have  the  following 

Rule. — Multiply  each  payment  l)y  the  time  it  has  to  run, 
divide  the  tsum  of  the  several  products  h/  the  sum  of  ths  'pay- 
ments, and  the  quotient  will  he  the  equated  time. 

Ex.  A  owes  B  $160;  $80  have  two  months  to  run;  $80 

4  months ;  $30,  6  months :  required,  the  equated  time. 

Operation,  $80  X  3  months  ==  160  month*. 

$50   "4        "       "   200 

$30  "  6        ''       "   180 


u 


$160  540         " 

Again,  540  months+160  dollars=3|  months,  answer. 
Proof.  Compute  the  interest  on  the  sum  of  the  payments 
for  the  equated  time,  and  also  on  each  payment  for  the  time 
it  has  to  run,  and,  if  correct  the  sum  of  the  interest  of  the 
several  payments,  will  be  equal  to  the  interest  of  the  sum  of 
the  payments  for  the  equated  time,  or  the  interest  of  $1  for 


AND   RAIL   ROAD    CALCULATOR.  93 

the  entire  number  of  months,  will  equal  each  of  the  othfers ; 

thus,  $160  X  2-  =  80  cents  ><  3|  months  =  $2.70 
80  "  i  "  40  "  "  2  '^  ^'  80 
50  "  i  "  25  "  "  4  "  ''  1.00 
30   "  J   "  15     "       "  6         "         "         90 


$2.70 
Or,  $1  X  ?  =  i  cent  X  540  months  =  $2.70 

TO  FIND  THE  TIME  FOR  ANY  PRINCIPAL  AT  A  GIVEN  RATE,   TO 

DOUBLE  ITSELF. 

CXXL  Now,  since  the  rate  percent,  is  equal  to  the  num- 
ber of  cents  which  a  dollar  will  draw  in  one  year,  it  follows 
that  at  one  per  cent.,  a  dollar  will  draw  but  1  cent  in  a 
year,  consequently  it  will  require  100  years  to  draw  100 
cents  or  to  double  itself. 

Now,  it  is  obvious  that  it  will  require  but  ,.  of  the  time 
for  any  principal  to  double  itself  at  5  per  cent.,  which  is 
required  at  1  per  cent.,  and,  since  it  takes  100  years  at  1  per 
cent,  to  double  itself,  then,  if  we  divide  100  by  5,  the  quo- 
tient will  be  the  time  required  for  any  principal  to  double 
itself  at  5  per  cent. ;  thus,  100-1-5=20  years,  the  time  re- 
quired; hence  we  have  ihe  following 

Mule. — Divide  100  hy  the  rate  per  cent..,  and  the  quotient  will 
le  the  time  required  for  anyprincijjal  to  double  itself. 

Ex.  How  long  will  it  take  a  principal  to  double  itself  at 

6  per  cent.  ?  Ans.  16 1  years  equal  to  16  years  and  8  months. 

MENSURATION.  — DEFINITIONS. 

CXXII.     1.  A  ^otTiHias  position  only. 
2.  A  line  has  length  only. 


M  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

3.  A  straight  line  is  the   shortest   distance  between  two 
given  points,  as  the  line  A B. 

4.  A  curved  line  changes  its  direction  continually;  as,  the 
line  C ^D. 

5.  An  angle  is  the  opening  of  two  lines  meeting  in  a  point. 

6.  A  right  angle  is  formed  by  a  straight  line  and  one  per- 
pendicular to  it,  as  the  angle 

A 


B— c 

7.  An  acute  angle  is  one  less  than  a  right  angle,  as  the 

y^  B 
angle  E:_ c 

8.  An  oUuse  angle  is  one  greater  than  a  right  angle ;  as, 

angle 


Mensuration  is  divided  into  two  parts,  viz :  mensuration 
of  surfaces  and  mensuration  of  solids  or  volumes. 

MENSURATION  OF  SURFACES. 

CXXIII.  A  surface  has  but  two  dimensions — length  and 
breadth,  and  is  measured  by  means  of  a  square  as  the  unit 
of  measures. 

It  is  applicable  to  the  measurement  of  every  thing  in 
which  surface  onijris  concerned. 

Every  portion  of  surface  may  be  regarded  as  bounded 
either  by  right  lines  or  by  curves. 


AND   EAIL   BOAD   CALCULATOE. 


95 


LAND  MEASURE. 

CXXIV.  The  square  is  the  simplest  form 
of  geometrical  figures ;  it  is  bounded  by  four 
lines  of  equal  dimension  having  all  its  ang- 
les, right  angles.     (See  figure  1.) 

TO  FIND  THE  AREA  OP  A  SQUARE,  &C. 

CXXY.  The  area  of  the  square,  and  that  of  all  its  spe- 
cies called  parallelograms,  is  found  by  multiplying  its  two 
dimensions  together  or  base  and  perpendicular,  and  the 
product  will  be  the  area  or  surface  in  the  same  denomina- 
tion as  the  given  dimensions.     (See  square  measure  rule  1.) 

Ex.  How  many  acres  are  there  in  a  piece  of  ground  20 
rods  square?     Ans.  400  rods=2  acres  2  roods. 

This,  and  similar  operations,  may  be  proved  by  dividing 
the  area  by  one  of  the  dimensions,  and  the  quotient  will  be 
the  other. 

2.  In  a  certain  piece  of  ground  containing  5  acres,  one  of 
its  sides  is  40  rods  long;  required  the  other?   Ans.  20  rods. 

3.  A  certain  piece  of  ground  is  80  cliains  long  and  30 
wide;  required  the  number  of  acres?    Ans.  240  acres. 

A  triangle  is  a  figure  bounded  by  three  straight  lines. 
(See  figure  2.)  Fig.  2.  ^ 


TO  FIND  THE  AREA  OF  A  TRIANGLE. 

CXXVI.    Now,  since  a  triangle  is  equal  to  two  right  ang- 
les,  it  follows  that  every  rectilineal  figure  must  be  equal  to 


i)6  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Iwo  triangles  (see  figure  1,  diagonal  D,  B) ;  consequently, 

the  area  of  a  triangle  can  only  be  half  as  much   as  that  of  a. 

square  or  parallelogram;  hence,  we  have  the  following 

Bule. — Multiply  the  altitude  hy  Jialf  the  dase,  the  product 
will  he  the  area  sought. 

Ex.  The  base  of  a  triangle  is  50  yards,  and  the  perpendi- 
cular 30  yards;  what  is  the  area?     Ans.  750  square  yards- 
Operation,  25X30=750. 

2.  How  many  acres  are  there  in  a  triangular  piece  of 
ground  whose  base  is  40  rods,  and  altitude  35  rods?  Ans. 
4  acres  1  rood  20  rods. 

THE  AREA   AND    ONE   OP  THE  DIMENSIONS  GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE 

OTHER. 

CXXyil.  Rule. — Beduce  the  area  to  the  denomination  in- 
dicated hy  the  given  dimension^  and  the  quotient  will  de  the  other. 

Ex.  In  a  certain  triangular  piece  of  ground  containing  7 

acres,  whose  base  is  60  rods;  required  the  altitude?     Ans. 

37^  rods. 

Ifote. — Any  one  of  the  sides  of  a  triangle  may  be  assumed 
as  the  base. 

TO  FIND  THE  AREA  OF  A  TRIANGLE  WITH  THE  PERIMETERS 
OR  THREE  SIDES  GIVEN. 

CXXVIII.  Rule. — Take  half  the  sum  of  the  sides,  subtract 
each  side  from  it;  multiply  the  three  remainder's,  and  half  the 
sum  together  ;  extract  the  square  root  of  the  product;  this  will  he 
ihe  area  in  square  units. 

Ex.   Sides  1  foot  10  inches;  2  feet;  3  feet  2  inches.  Ans. 

1  square  foot,  102  square  inches. 

A  trapezoid  is  a  figure  of  4  sides,  two  of  Fig.  3. 
which  are  parallel,  but  unequal,  and  are  called     /  v 

the  basis.     (See  figure  3.)  /  \ 


AND   EAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  97 

TO  FIND  THE  AREA  OF  A  TRAPEZOID. 

CXXIX.  Rule. — Take  the  half  the  sum  of  the  basis,  and' 
multiply  it  by  the  nllitude  after  expressing  them  in  the  same  de- 
'>'* omination,  and  the  product  will  be  the  area  in  square  units  of 
the  same  kind. 

Ex.  What  is  the  area  of  a  trapezoid  whose  bases  are  45 

rods  and  35,  and  altitude  20  rods?     Ans.  5  acres. 

Operation,  45+35=80-^2=40X20=800-^160=5  acres. 

TO  Fi:CiD  THE  AREA  OP   ANT   IRREGULAR  FIGURE  BOUNDED  BY 
FOUR  STRAIGHT  LINES  OR  MORE. 

CXXX.  Rule. — Resolve  the  area  of  the  figure  into  tri- 
angles, ana  the  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  several  triangles,  will 
be  the  area  sought. 

A  circle  is  a  portion  of  a  plane  bounded  by  a  B  Fig.  i 
curved  line,  every  point  of  which  is  equally 
distant  from  a  point  within  called  the  cen- 
tre ;  the  curved  line  A,  B,  C,  D,  is  called  A\ 
the  circumference;  the  point  C,  the  center; 
the  line  A  B  passing  through  the  center,  the 
diamater,  and  0  B,  the  radius.     See  fig.  4. 

THE  DIAMETER  OF  A  CIRCLE   BEING   GIVEN   TO  FIND  THE  CIR- 
CUMFERENCE. 

CXXXI.  Rule  I. — Multiply  the  diameter  by  ~,  and  the 
product  will  be  the  circumference. 

Ex.  What  is  the  circumference  of  a  circle  whose  diameter 
is  14?     Ans.  44,  the  circumference. 

THE  CIRCUMFERENCE   BEING   GIVEN   TO  FIND  THE  DIAMETER. 

Rule  IL— Multiply  the  circumference  by  ~,  and  the  product 
will  be  the  diameter. 


98  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Ex.  The  circumference  of  a  certain  circle  is  66  feet ;  re- 
quired the  diameter?    Ans.  21,  the  diameter. 

Note. — This  rule  is  the  converse  of  the  former,  and  the 
two  rules  mutually  prove  each  other. 

THE  DIAMETER  BEING  GIVEN  TO  FIND  THE  AREA  OP  A  CIRCLE. 

CXXXII.  Rule. — Find  the  circumferenae  hyrule  the  first; 
"multiply  the  circumference  and  diameter  together.,  and  divide 
the  product  hy  4,  and  the  quotient  will  he  the  area;  or  multiply 
the  square  of  the  diameter  l)y  r^  and  the  product  will  "be  the 
area  sought. 

Ex.     The   diameter  of  a  circular  piece  of  ground  is  35 

rods  :  required,   the   area.     Ans.    962i  rods=6  acres,    2— 

rods. 

Note.—  li  the  above  rules  are  not  perfectly  accurate,  they 
approximate  so  near  correctness  that  no  error  of  any  conse- 
quence will  result  from  their  use ;  nor  am  I  aware  that  the 
exact  relation  of  the  circumference  to  the  diameter  has 
ever  been  determined;  but  one  thing  is  certain,  that  much 
labor  and  time  will  be  saved  by  their  adoption. 

FLOORING,   CEILING,  ROOFING  AND  CARPETING. 

CXXXin.  ,  How  many   feet   of    plank,    allowing  i    for 

dressing,    will    be  sufficient  to  floor  and  ceil*   a    room 
whose  dimensions  are  30  ft.  by  20  ?     Ans.  1333  J^  feet. 

Operation,  30X20=600X2=1200  feet,  number  of  square 
feet   in  both  floors;  }^—l=l-  1200   feet— 1=1333^   feet. 

'    10       10       10  '  '10  •* 

Hence  when  a  deduction  is  to  be  made  for  waste  in  dress- 
ing, we  have  the  following 


*  Overliead  ceiling  is  meant. 


AND   BAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  99 

Rule. — F'.nd  the  number  of  square  feel  in  the  floors  ;  suh- 
iracl  the  fraction  denoting  the  waste  in  dressing  from  a  unity 
■and  divide  the  7iumber  of  square  feet  iyi  ike  floor  or  floors  hy 
the  remainder,  and  the  quotient  will  he  thenumber  sought. 

Ex.  How  many  feet  of  rough  plank  will  be  sufficient  to 
floor  a  room  24X18  feet,  allowing  L  for  dressing?  Ans. 
480  feet. 

2.  How  many  yards  of  carpet,  three  quarters  wide,  will 
be  sufficient  to  carpet  a  floor  24  feet  by  18?     Ans.  64  yds. 

Operation,  24X18=432  square  feet ;  432-^9=48  square 
jards ;  48-f-|=64  yards. 

TO  FIND  THE  NUMBER   OF   YARDS  AT   A  GIVEN  WIDTH  TO  CAR- 
PET A  FLOOR  OP  GIVEN  DIMENSIONS. 

CXXXIV.  Rule. — Find  the  number  of  square  yards  con- 
tained in  the  floor ;  divide  by  the  width  of  the  carpet^  and  the 
quoti&nt  will  be  the  number  of  yards  sought. 

Ex.  How  many  yards  of  carpet  will  it  take,  5  quarters 

wide,  to  carpet  a  floor  27  feet  by  16?     Ans.  36^  yards. 

2.  What  must  be  the  length  of  a  room  18  feet  wide  that 
64  yards  of  carpet,  3  quarters  wide,  will  cover.  Ans. 
24  feet. 

Operation,  64XI=48X9--=432-^18=24,  the  length  of  the 
room. 

3.  How  many  yards  of  paper  §  wide,  will  paper  a  room 
16  feet  by  14,  and  7  feet  high? 

Ans.  127   yards,  3  quarters  and  I'L  na. 

Note. — In  roofing  or  house  covering,  it  is  customary  to 
make  shingles  4  inches  wide,  and  to  ghow  6  inches ;  and  to 
make  rafters  \  of  the  width  of  the  house,  and  both  rafters 
being  taken  together   are  equal  to  1  of  the  width    of   the 

house. 


100  THE   MA]S^   OF   BUSINESS 

Ex.  How  many  shingles  will  it  require  to  cover  a  house 
24  feet  by  15?     Ans.     2880. 

Operation,     15X^=30X24=480-:- 1=2880.       Hence    we 

have  the  following 

Rule. — Multiply  the  vndih  by  '-  and  the  product  hy  the 
lengili  of  the  roof ;  divide  hy  1  of  a  foot,  and  the  quotient  will 
he  the  number  of  skijigles  sought. 

Ex.  How  many  shingles  will  be  necessary  to  cover  40 
feet  by  24?     Ans.  7680. 

Note. — The  same  result  may  be  obtained  by  reducing 
the  number  of  square  feet  in  the  roof  to  square  inches,  and 
dividing  by  the  number  of  square  inches  in  a  shingle ;  but 
this  would  be  quite  a  tedious  process. 

2.  Required,  the  number  of  shingles  necessary  to  cover 
a  house  28  feet  by  16  ? 

PLASTEBERS',  PAINTERS',  PAVEES'    AKD   CAEPENTEES'    WOEK.. 

CXXXV.     This   work   is  computed  by  the  square  yard ;, 
glaziers  work  by  the  squai-e  foot  or  pane ;  carpenters  and 
joiners  work  by  the  square  yard — sometimes  by  the  square, 
which  is  10  feet  square,  and  contains  100  square  feet. 

Ex.  What  will  it  cost  to  roof  a  house  at  40  cents  per 
square  yard,  30  feet  by  24?     Ans.  $41. 865. 

2.  "What  will  it  cost  to  plaster  the  walls  of  a  room  20 
feet  by  12  and  8  feet  [high,  at  20  cents  per  square  yard,  no 
deductions  being  made  for  doors  and  windows?  Ans. 
$11. 33^ 

3.  What  will  it  cost  to  ceil  a  room  30  feet  by  20,  8  feet 
high,  at  $2  per  square?     Ans.  $28.00. 

4.  Find  the  cost  of  paving  the  floor  of  a  court-room  50' 
feet  by  20  feet  and  6  inches,   at  75  cents  per  square  yard?:  ^ 
Ans.  $85.41i.  ' 


AND   EAIL  KOAD  CALCULATOR.     101 

BOARD    MEASURE. 

CXXXYI.  Board  measure  is  applied  to  the  measurement 
of  timber  oi  lumber  sawed. 

TO  MEASURE  IXCH  BOARDS    AND    BOARDS    LES3  THAN  AN  INCH 

IN  THICKNESS. 

CXXXVII.     Regardirsg  inch  boards  as  the  standard  or 

unit  of  comparison,  we  have  the  following 

Rule. — Multiph/  the  leyi.gth  and  width  together,  and  the  pro- 
duct 'Will  he  the  'tinmher  of  square  inches  or  feet  sought, 

Ex.     Required,   the  number  of   square   feet  in  an  inch 

board  12  feet  long  and  8  inches  wide?     Ans.   8  feet. 

Operation,  12X8=96 ;  96^12=8  feet. 

Note. — Such  operations  may  be  facilitated  by  reducing 
the  inches  or  primes  to  the  fraction  of  a  foot;  thus,  12X1 
=8  feet. 

Note  2  — In  order  to  find  the  number  of  feet  in  any  pile 
or  lot  of  luml)er,  the  most  accurate  method  is  to  find  the 
numljer  of  square  feet  in  one  board ;  multiply  this  by  the 
number  of  boards  in  the  pile  or  lot. 

Ex.  Required,    the   number  of  square    feet  in  a  lot  of 

boards   numbering   42,    each  board  being    14    feet  by   10 

inches.     Ans.  490. 

Note  3.  — Divide  the  number  of  square  feet  by  one  hundred, 
or  simply  separate  2  figures  on  the  right  hand,  the  figures 
on  the  left  will  express  the  number  of  hundreds,  and  those 
on  the  right  the  fraction  of  a  hundred. 

Rem.     It  is  customary,    I  believe,   to  buy  and  sell  inch 

bop.rds  and  those  less  than  an   inch  in   tliickness  at  the 

same  price. 

TO  MEASURE  LUMBER  MORE    THAN  AN    INCH  THICK. 

CXXXYIII.     Let  it  be  required  to  find  the  number  of 


102  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

square   feet   in  a  piece  of  lumber  measuring  12  feet  by  ^ 

inches,  2  inches  thick? 

Analysis.     Now,   it  is  obvious  that  if  the  board  were  12 

inches  or  one  foot  broad,   there  would  be  as  many  square 

surface  feet  as  there  are  linear  feet ;  but  as  the  board  is  but 

6  inches,  or  one-half  foot  wide,    it  will  require  2  feet  in 

length   to   make   one  square   foot ;  then,   if  we  divide  the 

number  of  feet  12X3,   the  quotient  will  be  the  number  of 

square  surface  feet  in  the  board,   regarding  it  as  an  inch 

board ;  but,  the  board  is  two  inches  thick,  consequently  it 

would  make  2  such  boards  if  split  or  divided  into  two, 

each    one  of  which  would  contain  12  square  surface  feet. 

Now,   by  multiplying  the  number  of  surface  feet  in  the 

board  by  2,  the  product  will  be  equal  to  the  sum  of  two 

such  boards  one  inch   thick  ;  thus,  6X2=12.     Hence  we 

have  the  following 

Rule  II. — Find  the  square  surface  feet  hy  rule  I;  mvltipl'^ 
the  number  of  feet  thus  found  hy  the  thickness  of  the  Ijoard  ex- 
pressed in  inches^  and  the  product  will  he  the  number  of  feet 
sought. 

Ex.  How  many  feet  are  there  in  3  pieces  of  lumber  15 
feet  long  10  inches  wide  and  3  inches  thick?     Ans.  1122  ft- 

Operation,  lbXl='^^  feetX^  inches=37l  number  of  feet 
in  one  piece ;  372  X  3  pieces=112^feet. 

The  correctness  of  this  rule  may  be  tested  by  resolving 
each  piece  of  lumber  into  3  inch  boards  making  9,  and  find- 
ing the  number  of  9  inch  boards  of  equal  dimension,  which 
will  equal  the  number  of  feet  found  in  the  example  above ; 
thus,   15X6^125X9=112^,  the  number  of  feet  sought. 

2.  What  will  a  lot  of  lumber  amount  to  containing  25 
pieces  14  feet  long,  8  inches  wide  and  3  inches  thick,  at  $1 
jper  hundred  feet?    Ans.  $7. 


AND   BAIL  ROAD   CALCULATOR.  103 

3.  Required  the  cost  of  a  lot  of  inch  boards  numbering 

73,   each  measuring  12  feet  by  9  inches,  at  67i  cents  per- 

hundred?     Ans.    $5.67, 

Note  1. — If  a  fraction  occur  in  the  thickness  of  a  board,, 
reduce  it  to  an  improper  fraction,  and  proceed  as  before ; 
thus  required  the  number  of  feet  in  a  board  13  feet  long  8 
inches  wide,  and  1^  inches  thick.     Ans.  12  feet. 

Operation,  12X^=8;  8X15=^12  feet. 

Note  3. — If  tlie  hoard  is  tapering,  take  half  the  sum  of  the 
width  of  its  ends  for  its  width. 

Ex.  What  are  the  contents  of  a  tapering  board  20  feet 
long  one  of  whose  ends  is  34  inches  wide,  and  the  other  10. 
inches?    Ans.  20  feet. 

Operation,  14+10=24-^2=12;  12  in.=l  footX30=20  ft.  . 

Note  3. — If  the  plank,  joist,  &c.,  is  tapering  in  width,  , 
take  half  the  sum  of  the  width  of  the  ends  for  the  width, 
and,  if  the  tapers  be  both  of  the  width  and  thickness,  the 
common  rule  of  obtaining  the  contents  in  cubic  feet  is  to 
midtiply  half  tJie  sum  of  the  areas  of  the  two  ends  Inj  the  length, 
and  divide  the  product  hy  144. 

Ex.  How  many  feet  in  a  beam  20  feet  long  10  in.  thick 

whose  width  tapers  from  18  to  16  inches.     Ans.  283^  feet. 

Operation,  18+16=34-+2=17x20=340-i-12=28iXl<)= 
283i. 

MENSURATION  OF  LOG  OR  ROUND  TIMBER. 

CXXXIX.      WJien  fhe  log  is  of  uniform  girth. 
Rule  I. — Multiply  the  area  of  one  end  hy  the  length  of  the 
log,  and  the  product  will  he  the  numher  of  cuhic  units 

Ex.  How  many  solid  feet  in  a  log  21  in.  in  diameter  and 

16  feet  long?     Ans.  SSk  feet. 

Operation,  21  in.=^  of  afootX','==5^XI='J+4=^'3^Xl6=38^, 

382.     (See  rule  IV  for  finding  the  area  of  the  circle.) 


104  THE   MKN   OF   BUSINESS 

WTien  the  log  is  not  of  uniform  girth. 

Rule  11. — Multiply  the  length  talcen  in  feet  hy  the  square.^  of 
\  of  the  mean  girth  taken  in  inches^  and  this  product  divided 
hj  144  will  give  the  contents  in  cubic  feet. 

Ex.  If  a  stick  of  timber  is  50  feet  long,  and  its  mean 
girth  56  inches;  what  number  of  cubic  feet  does  it  contain? 
Ans.  68/3. 

Operation,  56^4=14X14=1 96>  50=9800-f-144=68,V 

Note  1. — The  girth  of  a  tapering  log  is  usually  taken  about 
^  the  distance  from  the  larger  to  the  smaller  end. 

Note  2. — The  above  rule  is  not  perfectly  accurate,  though 
it  is  the  one  generally  used  by  business  men. 

3.  How  many  cubic  feet  in  a  stick  of  timber  which  is  30 
feet  long,  and  whose  mean  girth  is  40  in.  ?    Ans.  30g  feet. 

3.  How  many  cubic  inches  in  a  log  of  wood  24  feet  long, 
and  whose  mean  girth  is  22  inches? 

MENSURATION  OF  SOLIDS  OR  VOLUMES. 

CLX.  This  measure  is  used  for  finding  the  solid  contents 

of  bodies,  and  capacity  of  rooms,  boxes,  &c.,  and  involves 

three   dimensions,  namely :  length,  breath,  and  thickness ; 

hence,  to  find  the  solid  contents    of  bodies,  we  have  the 

following 

Mule. — Multiply  the  three  dimensions  together.,  and  the  pro- 
duct will  de  the  cubic  units  sought.,  whether  inches.,  feet.,  yards., 
<Sx. 

Ex,  How  many  cubic  inches  are  there  in  a  block  of  wood 
6  in.  long,  4  in.  wide,  and  3  in.  thick?     Ans.  72  inches. 

Operation,  6X4=24X3=72. 

Proof.  Divide  the  solid  contents  by  the  product  of  twa 
of  the  dimensions,  and  the  quotient  will  be  the  other ;  thus, 
72-^4X3=12=6  and  so  on. 


AND   EAIL   EOAD   ^ALCULATOK.  105 

2.  What  would  it  cost  to  dig  a  cellar  30  feet  long-,  8  feet 
wide,  and  6  feet  deep,  at  2  cents  per  solid  foot?  Ans.  $16.80, 

3.  What  will  a  pile  of  wood  come  to,  16  feet  long,  8  feet 
high,  and  4  feet  thick,  at  $2  per  cord?     Ans.  ^8. 

CRIB  AND  BOX  MEASURE. 

€LXI.  To  find  the,  numler  of  lusJtels  which  a  box,  crib,  or 
tin  will  contain. 

Bute.  — Multiply  the  number  of  cubic  feet  by  5,  and  the  pro- 
duct will  be  tlie  number  of  bushels  s&ught. 

Ex.  How  many  bushels  of  grain  can  be  put  into  a  box  6 
feet  long,  4  feet  wide,  and  3  feet  deep?  Ans.  57  bushels, 
3  pecks,  3  J-  quarts. 

Note. — If  the  corn  is  in  the  ear  to  find  the  number  of 
bushels  in  shelled  corn,  multiply  by  \  instead  of  \.   • 

Ex.  How  many  bushels  of  corn  will  a  crib  hold  20  feet, 
6  in.  long,  4  ft.  wide,  and  8  feet  high?     Ans.  26?j  bushels. 

Operation,  20  feet  6  in.=20i  feetX4==82X3-=656X5= 
262^  bushels. 

Note  2. — Though  the  above  rule  is  not  perfectly  accurate, 
yet  it  is  sufficiently  so  for  all  practical  purposes ;  in  order 
to  be  perfectly  accurate,  the  solid  contents  of  the  crib  or 
box  to  be  measured,  must  be  reduced  to  cubic  inches,  and 
divided  by  2150:^,  the  number  of   cubic  inches  in  a  bushel, 

TO  riND  THE  CONVEX  SURFACE  OF* A  CONE  OR  PYRAMID. 

CLXII.  B,ul€. — Multiply  the  perimeter  or  circumference  of 
tlie  base  by  half  of  the  slant  height,  and  to  the  product  add  the 
area  of  the  base. 

Ex.  What  is  the  convex  surface  of  a  cone  whose  slant 

height  is  20  feet,  and  the  diameter  of  whose  base  is  9  feet? 

Ans.  90  feet. 


106  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS     • 

TO  FIND  THE  VOLUME  OF  A  CONE  OR  PTKAMID, 

CLXIII.  Bule. — Multiply  the  ana  of  the  lase  lyy  \  of  the 
altitude. 

Ex.  What  is  the  solidity  of  a  cone  whose  slant  height  is 
12|  feet,  and   the  diameter  of  whose  base  is  2i  feet.     Ans^ , 
20.45  feet  +. 

mason's  and  bricklayer' b  work. 

CLXIV.  Mason's  work  is  sometimes  measured  by  the 
cubic  foot,  and  sometimes  by  the  perch  which  is  I62  feet 
long,  and  Ik  wide,  and  1  foot  deep,  and  contain  IG^Xl^X 
l=24i  cubic  feet. 

TO  FIND  THE  NUMBER  OF  PERCHES  IN   A  PIECE   OF    MASONRY. 

CLXV.  Rule. — Find  the  solidity  of  the  wall  in  cubic  feet  "by 
the  rules  given  for  the  mensuration  of  solids^  and  divide  ?^  24|., 

Note. — Brick  work  is  generally  estimated  by  the  thousand 
bricks,  usual  size  being  6  inches  long,  4  inches  wide  and  2 
or  2J  thick.  When  bricks  are  laid  in  mortar,  an  allowance 
of  one-tenth  is  made  for  the  mortar. 

Ex.  How  many  perches  are  there  in  a  wall  100  feet  long, 

5  feet  high,  and  2  feet  thick?    Ans.  40 JJ  perches. 

TO   FIND   THB   NUMBER   OF   BRICK   NECESSARY   TO   MAKE   ANY 
PIECE   OF   MASONRY.  J' 

CLXVI.  Rule. — Find  the  number  ef  solid  feet  hy  the  rule 
already  given,  divide  by  the  number  of  inches  in  a  hrich  reduced 
to  the  fraction  of  a  cubic  foot,  and  the  quotient  will  be  the  num- 
ber of  brides,  but, if  an  allowance  is  to  be  made  for  mortar,  mul- 
tiply the  number  of  bricTcs  hy  l^^,  and  the  product  will  be  the  num- 
ber required. 


AND  EAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.     lOT 

Ex.  How  many  brick  8  in.  by  4,  and  2i  in.  thick,  will  be 
required  to  build  the  walls  of  a  houso  30  feet  by  20,  16  feet 
high,  and  18  in.  thick;  no  allowance  being  made  for  mor-: 
tar.     Ans.  56,000. 

Note. — Add  the  length  and  iridth  together,  and  multi])ly  ty 
2  ;  the  product  will  l)e  the  entire  length  of  the  zcall. 

Operation,    100X16—1600X5=2400-^^^=56,000. 

Note  2. — In  the  walls  of  a  house  an  allowance  must  be 
made  for  doors  and  windows,  which  must  be  determined 
by  the  dimensions  of  the  doors  and  windows  given. 

2.     Required,    the   cost   of  a  brick  wall  150  feet  long,  8 

feet  6  inches  high,  1    foot   4   inches  thick,  allowing  A    for 

mortar,  at  $7  per  thousand?    Ans.  ^289.17. 

HEIGHTS  AJSTD  DEPTHS  MEASURED  BY   THE  VELOCITY  OF  FALL- 
ING  BODIES. 

CXLYIL  A  body  falling  from  any  height  towards  the 
earth,  will  fall  during  the  first  second  16  feet,  and  continue 
to  increase  in  velocity  throughout  its  entire  course.  The 
law  of  acceleration  is  expressed  by  the  odd  numbers  1,  3,  5, 
7,  &c. 

If  we  take  the  complement*  of  three  odd  numbers,  as  J, 
\    L,  &c.,  the  relation  of    the  numerator  to  the  denomina- 

tor  will  express  the  comparative  increase  of  velocity  during 
each  consecutive  second ;  for  instance,  in  each  J  the  numer- 
ator expresses  the  comparative  distance  a  body  will  fall  in  the 
first  second,  and  the  denominator  the  comparative  distance 
in  the  second    second;  thus,  i=H;  hence,  if   we  multiply 


48 


*  Tbe  complement  of  a  number  is  the  quotient  of  a  unit  divided  by  that 
iminber.      , 


,i^'' 


108  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

16  by  the  odd  numbers  1,  3,  5,  7,  &c.,  the  product  will  be 
the  distance  the  body  will  fall  each  successive  second; 
thus  : 

16    X   1  =  16     first    second. 

16     "   3    "  48  second     " 

16     "   5    "  80  third 

16     -'7    "  112  fourth     " 

256 
The  sum  of  these  numbers  is  equal  to  the  distance  (256) 
which  a  body  falls  during  4  seconds  of  time.  Now,  if  we 
square  the  time  4  seconds,  and  multiply  the  square  by  16, 
it  will  be  equal  to  the  sum  of  the  several  numbers ;  thus, 
4X4=16X16=256,  the  space. 

THE  TIME  IN  SECONDS  BEING   GIVEN   TO  FIND  THE  SPACE. 

CXLYIII.  B.jj'L'E.— Square  the  time  exj^ressedin  seconds,  mid- 
tiply  the  square  hj  16,  and  the  product  will  l)e  the  space  ex- 
pressed in  linear  feet. 

Ex.  If  we  drop  a  heavy  body  into  a  well,  and  observe 
the  time  it  is  falling  to  be  3  seconds,  required  the  depth 
of  the  w^ell.     Ans.  144  feet. 

Operation,   3X3=9X16=144. 

2.  If  a  body,  dropped  from  the  top  of  a  mountain,  occu- 
pied 5  seconds  in  falling,  required  the  height  of  the  moun- 
tain.    Ans.    400  feet. 

THE  SPACE  BEING  GIVEN   TO   FIND  THE  TIME. 

CXLIX.  Rule  II. — Divide  the  space  'by  16,  and  extract  the 
square  root  of  the  quotient^  and  the  root  thus  found  will  he 
the  time  in  seconds. 


AND   EAIL   EOAD    CALCCLATOrv.  109 

Ex.  A  body  has  fallen  through  the  space  of  400  feet,  re- 
quired, the  time.     Ans.  5  seconds. 

Operation,  400^16=25;  the  square  root  of  25  is  5,  time 
required. 

Note. — The  second  rule  is  the  converse  of  the  first,  and 
the  two  rules  mutually  prove  each  other. 

DISTANCE  MEASUKED  BY  THE  VELOCITY  OF  SOUND, 

CI .  Philosophers  have,  by  experiments  and  close  observa- 
t'o:i,  discovered  that  the  velocity  of  sound  through  the  air,  at 
a  mean  rate,  is  1130  feet  per  second,  and  that  this  is  not 
affected  at  all  by  loud  or  low  sounds,  by  clear  or  cloudy 
weather,  and  is  but  sligiitly  modified  by  favorable  or  ad- 
verse winds.     Hence  we  have  the  following 

Rule. — ^lultiply  1130  feet  Ijy  tlie  time  exi^ressed  in  secoiicls 
ichich  elapse  detweeii  tJie  Jiash  of  lightDing  or  gim'poicder  and 
t!ie  report  caused  'by  the  explosion,  and  the  pjroduct  Kill  he  the 
distance  in  feet. 

Ex.     If  30  seconds  elapse  between  the  flash  of  lightning 

and  the  report  of  the  thunder,  what  is  the  distance  of  the 

the   cloud?     Ans.  6'"  miles. 

2.  If  20  seconds  elapse  between  the  flash  of  powder  and 
the  report  caused  by  the  explosion  of  a  cannon,  what  is 
the  distance  of  the  gun? 

Note. — If  the  above  rule  is  not  perfectly  accurate,  it  is 
quite  satisfactory  in  the  absence  of  a  better  one. 

GAUGING  OF  CASKS. 

CLI.  Gauging  is  the  process  of  finding  the  capacity  of 
casks  or  other  vessels. 

Casks  are  generally  considered  to  be  of  four  varieties. 


110  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

First  class,  having  the  staves  nearly  straight. 
Second,  having  the  staves  very  little  curved. 
Third,  having  the  staves  of  a  medium  curve. 
Fourth,  having  the  staves  considerably  curved. 

TO  FIND  THE  MEAN  DIAMETER  IN  GAUGING. 

CLII.  The  first  thing  to  be  done  in  gauging,  is  to  find  the 
mean  diameter ;  this  may  be  done  by  observing  the  follow- 
ing 

Rule. — First  Class. — Add  the  'product  of  the  difference  be- 
tween the  two  diameters  ^^  -^  or  .55,  to  the  head  diameter  and 
the  amount  will  he  the  mean  diameter.  Second  Class. — Add 
the  prodzict  to  the  difference  X  ^or  .60.  Third  Class. — Add 
the  product  of  the  difference  x  }^  or  .65.  Fourth  Class. — 
Add  the  product  of  the  difference  x  I'o  or  .  70. 

TO  FIND  THE  CAPACITY  OF  CASKS. 

CLIII.  Rule. — Multiply  the  square  of  the  mean  diameter  in 
inches^  hy  the  length  in  inches,  and  the  product  multiplied  Iry 
.0034,  will  give  the  capacity  in  liquid  or  wine  gallons. 

Ex.  Required  the  capacity  in  gallons  of  a  cask  of  the  4th 
variety  whose  middle  diameter  is  35  inches,  and  head  dia- 
meter 27  inches,  and  length  45  inches.     Ans.  162.6  gal. 

2.  How  many  gallons  will  a  cask  of  the  first  class  contain 

whose  bung  diameter  is  30  inches,  and  head  diameters  28 

inches,  length  42  inches?     Ans.   120.92-|-. 

Note. — If  the  number  of  cubic  inches  in  any  vessel  be 
found,  and  divided  by  231,  the  quotient  will  be  the  number 
of  gallons  sought  in  wine  or  liquid  measure ;  but,  if  beer 
measure,  divide  by  282,  and  the  quotient  will  be  the  gallons 
in  beer  measure. 

Ex.  How  many  wine  gallons  will  a  cubic  box  contaiu 


AND  EAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.     Ill 

tliat  is  10  feet  long,  5  feet  wide  and  4  feet  high?     Ans. 
1,496,^7  gallons. 

2.  How  many  gallons,  beer  measure,  will  a  cylindric  ves- 
sel contain  whose  diameter  is  21  inches,  and  32  in.  deep? 
Ans.  39  gallons. 

MISCELLANEOUS. 

CLIV.  1.  Required  the  number  of  rails  10  feet  long,  8 
rails  to   the  panel  to  enclose  a  field  containing  5  acres. 

Operation,  5  acres  x  160  rods=800  rods-^20=40 ;  40+20 

=60X2=120  rods,  the  circumference  of  the  field;  2  panels 

lieing  allowed  to  the  rod,  120  rods  X  2=240  panels,  240  X  8 

=1,920  rails. 

Note. — If  the  circumference  is  given,  multiply  the  num- 
ber of  rods  by  2,  and  the  product  will  be  the  number  of 
panels,  which  multiplied  by  the  number  of  rails  assigned  to 
the  panel,  and  the  product  will  be  the  number  required ; 
but,  if  the  contents  of  the  field  are  given  in  acres,  reduce 
them  to  square  rods,  and  assume  any  number  as  one  line 
not  greater  than  the  sum  of  the  two  dimensions,  and  divide 
the  number  of  square  rods  by  the  assumed  line  or  dimen- 
sion, and  the  quotient  will  be  the  other  dimension  or  line, 
and  then  proceed  as  before.     (See  the  operation.) 

CAUSE  AND  EFFECT. 

CLY.  A  caviM  is  that  which  produces  something  or  causes 
something  to  be  done ;  as,  men,  horses,  &c. 

2.  An  effect  is  that  which  results  from  an  operation  of 
some  cause  whether  known  or  unknown. 

3.  Solutions  by  cause  and  effect  are  much  to  be  preferred 
to  the  method  of  statements  in  proportion. 

4.  Causes  are  either  simple  or  compound. 


112  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

5.  Compoinid  causes  ma}^  be  reduced  to  simple  ones  by 
miiltiplyiug  their  elements  together. 

METHOD  OF  STATING  BY  CAUSE  AND  EFFECT. 

CLVI.  Bule. — As  the  first  cause  is  to  the  first  effect^  so  is 
the  second  cause  to  the  second  effect. 

Note  1. — The  first  and  last  terras  are  called  the  extremes, 
and  those  intermediate,  the  means. 

Note  2. — If  the  unknown  quantity  fall  in  the  extremeSj 
the  product  of  the  extremes  must  be  the  divisor,  and  the 
X^roduct  of  the  means,  the  dividend,  and  mce  versa. 

Ex.  If  4  men,  in  3  days,  can  build  i-  of  a  wall,  what  part 
can  6  men  build  in  4  days?  4  men  and  3  days,  the  first 
cause ;  i  the  first  eff'ect ;  6  men  and  4  days,  the  second 
cause;  1,  the  second  effect,  4X3  ,'  i[  '.^X^  .*  ^  ^^^  statement. 

Operation,  4X3=12X1=12.  divisor;  6x4=24X^=6,  divi- 
dend; thus,  6^12=5  of  the  wall,  the  answer. 

2.  If  4  men,  in  3  days,  can  build  i  of  a  wall,  how  many 
men  must  be  employed  for  4  days  to  build  2?  Statement, 
4  men  and  3  days  J^  ,'  ;  1  and  4  daj^sj  5.     Ans.  6  men. 

2.  Three  carpenters,  A,  B  and  C,  can  build  a  house  in  31 
months;  A  and  B  can  build  it  in  4  months  in  what  time 
can  C  build  it  w^orking  alone?     Ans.   28  months. 

Solution,  35=^;  14-2=??  what  3  did  in  one  month;  1-^ 
=i  what  2  did  in  one  month;  ^ — i=/g;  what  C  did  in  one 
month,  if  C  did  /g  in  one  month,  it  will  require  28  months 
to  complete  the  work. 

Suggestion.  This  question  may  be  proved  by  adding 
wdiat  C  did  to  what  A  and  B  did,  and  the  sum  will  be  equal 
to  what  the  three  did. 


AND   EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOE.  113 

3.  How  many  acres  are  there  in  a  round  field  56  rods  in 
diameter?     Ans.  15^  acres. 

Solution,  56XT=l'^6X56=9856-i-4=2464-M60  rods=l52 
acres. 

4.  If  i  of  6  be  3,  what  will  k  of  30  be?     Ans.  7h. 
Solution,  3^6=6^=1X3  third=^x20=^"=30-f4=7i. 

5.  A  and  B  have  the  same  income,  A  saves  |  of  his  an- 
nually, but,  B,  by  spending  $200  a  year  more  than  A,  at 
the  end  5  years,  finds  himself  $160  in  debt;  what  is  their 
income? 

Solution.   ^160-^5=32;  200—32=168X8=1344. 

6.  2  men,  A  and  B,  on  opposite  sides  of  a  plat  of  ground 
536  yards  in  circumference,  set  out  at  the  same  time  in  the 
same  direction,  to  walk  around  it ;  A  walks  at  the  rate  of 
11  yards  in  one  minute,  and  B,  at  the  rate  of  34  yards  in  3 
minutes ;  how  many  times  must  B  walk  around  before  he 
overtakes  A? 

Solution.  11X3  min.  =33  yards;  34—33=1  yard-^34=^ 
the  gain  on  one  yard  ;  533-;-2=268,  distance  between  them  ; 
368-f-i4=9,112-f-536=17,  the  answer. 

7.  A  fox  starts  up  50  yards  in  advance  of  a  greyhound ; 
the  dog  bounds  away  in  pursuit  at  the  rate  of  12  feet  a  leap  ; 
the  fox  scuds  away  at  the  rate  of  8  feet  a  leap;  but  the  fox 
makes  7  leaps  while  the  dog  makes  5  ;  required  the  distance 
the  dog  must  run  before  he  overtakes  the  fox,  and  the  num- 
ber of  leaps  each  must  make.  Ans.  2, 250  feet,  the  distance 
required;  1872  dog  leaps;  262^  fox  leaps. 

Solution,  12X5=60 ;  8X7=56;  60— 56=4-f-60=6-o=i7,  the 
gain  on  one  foot ;  50X3=150  feet  distance  between ;  150-^1 
=2250,  the  distance    the  dog  runs;  2250-i-12=1875   dog 


114  THE   MA^   OF   BUSINESS 

leaps;  3250—150=2100-^-8=262^,  the  number  of  fox  leaps. 

8.  A  certain  young  gentleman,  it  is  said,  asked  an  old 
gentleman  for  his  daughter  in  marriage,  and  received  the 
following  answer ;  there  are  3  gates  between  us  and  the 
orchard;  go  into  the  orchard,  and  gather  such  a  number  of 
apples  as  will  enable  you,  at  the  first  gate,  to  leave  h  and  J 
an  apple  over,  at  the  second  gate,  leave  h  the  remainder 
and  i  an  apple  over,  and  at  the  third  gate  leave  half  you 
have,  and  I-  an  apple  over  and  bring  me  one  apple ;  do  this 
without  dividing  an  apple  and  my  daughter  shall  be  yours ; 
required  the  number. 

Solution,  1-j- 5=1^X2=3,  the  number  he  had  on  reaching 
the  last  gate ;  d-\-i=dh'X2=7  the  number  brought  to  the 
second  gate;  7~\-i=7^y(2==15,  the  number  required.  R»- 
verse  the  order  of  procedure,  and  the  proof  will  be  easy; 
thus,  leave  8  at  the  first  gate,  4  at  the  second,  2  at  the 
third,  and  1  is  left. 

9.  A  certain  man,  at  his  decease,  bequeathed  to  his  3 
children,  2  sons  and  1  daughter,  459  acres  of  land  to  be  di- 
vided among  them  as  follows:  the  younger  son's  portion 
must  equal  j  of  the  elder  son's,  and  the  daughter's,  | ;  re- 
quired the  share  of  each 

Solution,  5+5+1  reduced  to  a  common  denominator = 

2?  li,  l£=5L;  since  the  denominators  are  alike  they  are  can- 
so?    20'   20      20  '  "^ 

celled,  and,  as  the  sum  of  numerators,  expresses  the 
number  of  parts  into  which  the  given  number  is  to  be 
divided,  it  may  be  tr^^i^sferred  to  the  denominator;  thus, 
I?  ^A.  and  l^ ;  now,  the  numerators  express  the  proportional 
parts  to  be  taken  thus,  459+-51=9X20=180,  the  elder 
son's  share;  9X16=144,  the  younger  son's  share;  9X15== 
135,  the  daughter's  share. 


AND   RAIL   KG  AD   CALCULATOR.  115 

Proof,  180+144+135=459;  but,  according  to  the  concli - 
tion  of  the  question,  the  younger  son's  share  must  be  I  of 
the   elder   son's;    the  daughter's,  2,  thus  li^==i;   H5=l 

10.  A  certain  man,  looking  on  his  watch,  was  asked  the 
time  of  day;  he  replied  the  time  past  noon  is  equal  to  I  of 
the  time  pa^st  midnight ;  w^hat  was  the  time?  Ans.  3  o'clock. 
Solution.  I — 1=1-  12+^=15  hours— 12=3,  the  time  sought. 

11.  A  man  dying,  worth  $5,450,  left  a  wife  and  two 
children,  a  son  and  daughter,  absent  in  a  foreign  country ; 
he  directed  if  his  son  returned,  the  mother  should  have  ^ 
of  the  estate,  and  the  son  the  remainder ;  but,  if  the  daugh- 
ter returned,  she  was  to  have  i,  and  the  mother  the  remain- 
der ;  now,  it  so  happened  that  they  both  returned ;  how 
must  the  estate  be  divided  to  fulfill  the  father's  intentions? 

Solution,  1+3+4=7;  !^5,460+7=$780,  daughter's  share  ; 
$780X2=1,560,  wife's  share;  $780X^=3,120,  son's  share. 

12.  A  traveler  found  a  purse  of  money;  h  of  its  contents 
was  silver,  I  gold  and  $20  in  greenbacks ;  how  many  dollars 
did  the  purse  contain  i? 

Solution,  ^+H'o;  K— 'o=iO=^^20;  20X10=200,  number 
of  dollars. 

Proof,  k  of  200  =        100,  silver; 

I  of  200  ==  80,  gold ; 

Greenbacks,  =    20 


The  sum, 

RULE  FOR  EXTRACTING  THE  SQUARE  ROOT. 

CLYII.  I.  Separate  the  given  number  into  periods  of  twa 
figures^  commencing  at  units;  the  left  hand  period  may  con  fairs, 
hut  one  figure. 


116  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

n.     Take  the  square  root  of  the  left  hand  period  for  the  first 
figure  in  the  root. 

III.  Subtract  the  square  of  this  from  the  left  hand  period, 
Irring  down  the  next  period ;  divide  the  result,  exclusive  of  the 
right  hand  figure,  ly  twice  the  part  of  the  root  already  found  ; 
the  quotient  will  de  the  second  figure  of  the  root. 

IV.  Set  this  figure  of  the  root  on  the  right  of  the  divisor; 
multiply  the  divisor  thus  completed  h/  the  second  figure  of  the 
root ;  subtract  the  product  from  the  last  dividend,  and  bring 
down  another  period. 

V.  Double  the  root  already  found  for  a  trial  divisor,  find 
another  figure  of  the  root,  and  proceed  as  before,  till  all  the  pe- 
riods have  been  brought  down. 

Ex.  Required,  the  square  root  of  2809. 

Op  eration,     2809  (53  square  root. 
25 

103)309 
309 

000 
Proof.     Raise  the  root  to   the  second  power,  and  the  re_ 
suit  will  be  equal  to  the  given  number  ;  thus  53X53=2809. 

Note  1. — Annex  periods  of  naughts  to  obtain  decimals. 

Note  2. — The  square  root  of  a  common  fraction,  is  the 
equal  root  of  the  numerator  divided  by  the  square  root  of 
the  denominator ;  but,  if  the  denominator  is  not  a  square, 
.make  it  so  by  multiplying  both  terms,  of  the  faction  by  the 
denominator ;  or  the  root  may  be  obtained  by  reducing  the 
common  fraction  to  a  decimal,  and  extracting  the  the  root 
as  integral  numbers. 

Two   brothers  bought   a   tract   of  land   containing  200 

acres,  for  which  they  were  to  pay  |'8O0,  each  paying  an  equal 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR. 


117 


sum;  but  one  end  of  the  land  being  richer   than  the  other, 

the  elder  brother  proposed  to   the   younger   that  he  would 

pay  50  cents  more  per   acre   if  he  would  let  him  have  the 

better  portion  ;  this  being  agreed  to,  required  the  number 

of  acres  each  should  receive,  and  the  price  per  acre. 

C  Elder  brother's,  93i-j-9'Cres. 
.  J  Younger  brother's,  106^  acres,  nearly. 

^^-       ]  Price  of  elder  brother's,  $4,265+. 

[Price  of  younger  brother's,  $3.765-|-. 

RULE  FOR  SOLUTION. 

CLVIIl.  Divide  half  the  whole  cost  by  the  whole  number  of 
acres,  and  to  the  square  of  the  quotient  add  the  square  of  half 
ihe  difference  of  the  price  per  acre;  then  extract  the  square  root 
of  the  sum,  and  to  this  root  add  ihe  quotient  of  half  ihe  whole 
cost,  divided  by  the  whole  number  of  acres.  This  last  sum  in- 
creased by  haf  the  difference  of  ihe  price  per  acre,  will  give 
ihe  price  per  acre  of  the  best  land,  and  diminished  b  y  the  same, 
will  give  the  price  per  acre  of  the  poorest  land. 


LEaA-L   FORMS 

NECESSAKY   IN   ORDINARY   BUSINESS, 
PKEPAEED  BY 

RICHARD  WATT  YORK,  A.  M. 

Attorney  and  Counsellor  at  Law. 


u  s 


affidavit. 

North  Carolina, 

Chatham  County y 

Personally  appeared  before  me,  John  Doe,  a  Justice  of  the' 
Peace  in  and  for  the  County  and  State  aforesaid,  Eichard 
Boe^  who  being  duly  sworn  doth  depose  and  say  that  {in- 
sert here  the  facts  as  they  exist.'] 

John  Doe,  J.  P. 


AGREEMENT. 

Articles  of  agreement  made,  entered  into,  and  concluded 

upon  this  the  —  day  of ,  187 — ,  between  John^Doe,  of 

the  first  part,  and  Richard  Boe,  of  the  second  part : 

First,  for  and  in  consideration  of  \here  insert  the  consid- 
eration as  it  exists  whether  money,  property^  worh^  cfcc.,]  to  said" 
John  Doe,  paid  by  Richard  Roe,  the  said  John  Doe  covenants, , 
promises  and  agrees  to  [here  insert  the  agreement  on  the  part' 
of  the  first  pzrty.'] 

Second,  for  and  in  consideration  of  \Jiere  insert  the  consid- 
eration as  it  exists  whether  money,  property,  worlc,  (&g.,]  to 
Richard  Roe  paid  by  JaJm  Doe,  the  said  Richard  Roe  cove- 
nants, promises  and  agrees  to  [here  insert  the  terms  of  the  agree  •* 
ment.'\ 


120  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

And  the  said  Jolm  Doe  and  Richard  Roe,  for  themselves, 
their  heirs,  executors  and  assigns,  mutually  covenant,  pro- 
mise and  agree  the  one  with  the  other,  that  they  will  sev- 
•erally  perform  the  stipulations  as  above  mentioned  by  them 
jespectively  assumed. 

In  witness  whereof,  the  said  JoTin  Doe  and  Richard  Roe 

have  hereunto  set  their  hands  and  seals,  the  day  and  date 

above  written. 

Sealed  and  delivered  in  )  John  Doe,         {Seal.'] 

the  preience  of .  \  Richard  Roe,  {Seal.] 


AGREEMENT  FOR  THE  SALE  OF  AN  ESTATE  IN  LAND. 

Articles  of  agreement  entered  into,  made  and  concluded, 
this  the  —  day  of ,  187 — ,  between  A.  B.  and  C.  D. 

The  said  A.  B.  agrees  to  sell  to  the  said  C.  D.  all  that 
tract  or  parcel  of  land,  with  the  appurtenances  thereunto 
belonging,  known  as  the place,  bounded  as  follows,  be- 
ginning at  [here  insert  the  boundaries., ]  containing acres, 

more  or  less,  for  the  sum  of dollars ;  and,  on  receipt 

of  said  sum  of  money  on  or  before  the  —  day  of ,  187 — , 

the  said  A.  B.  will  execute  a  good  and  sufficient  title  at 
law  and  in  equity  in  fee  simple  to  the  said  C.  D.  with  a 
covenant  of  general  warranty  as  to  title  and  against  en- 
cumbrances, to  the  said  C.  D.,  his  heirs  and  assigns. 

And  the  said  C.  D.  agrees  that,  upon  the  due  and  proper 
execution  of  a  good  and  sufficient  conveyance  in  fee  simple, 

he  will  pay  the  said  the  sum  of dollars  to  the  said 

A.  B.  or  his  assigns. 

In  testimony  of  all  which  things  the  said  A.  B.  and  C.  D. 


AND   EAIL   HOAD    OALOULATOK.  121 

have  signed  their  names,  and  affixed  their  seals,  the  day  and 

date  above  specified. 

In  the  presence  of    )  A.  B.,  fSeal.] 

E.  F.,  V  C.  D.,  [Seal] 

G.  H. 


ARTICLES  OP  AGREEMENT  TO  FORM  A  COPARTNERSHIP. 

Articles  of  agreement  made  and  concluded  on  this  the  — 
day  of ,  187 — ,  between  John  Den  and  Richard  Fen. 

First,  the  said  John  Den  and  Richard  Fen  have  agreed 
and,  by  these  presents  do  hereby  agree,  to  form  a  partner- 
ship under  the  name  and  style  of  Den  and  Fen  for  the  pur- 
pose of  carrying  on  the  business  of at . 

Second,  the  capital  stock  shall  consist  of dollars,  of 

which   amount  John  Den  is  to  advance  dollars,  and 

Richard  Fen  is  to  advance,  [any  other  agreements  mayl)e  in- 
serted as  the  fa£.ts  in  the  case  may  justify.'] 

The  said  partnership  shall  continue  from  the  —  day  of 
. ,  187—,  until  the  —  day  of ,  187—. 

In  testimony  whereof,  &c. 


ASSIGNMENTS. 

A  general  form  of  assignments  by  indorsement  on  the 
back  of  any  instrument,  whether.  Agreement,  Mortgage, 
Bond,  &c.,  conveying  personal  property. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that,  I,  the  within  nam- 
ed John  Doe^  for  and  in  consideration  of  the  sum  of  one  dol- 
lar to  me  paid  by  Richard  Roe.,  have  assigned  to  the  said 


122  THE   MAN   OF  BUSINESS 

MicJiard  Roe  all  my  interest  in  the  within  written  instru- 
ment, and  every  clause,  article,  or  thing  therein  contained. 
\where  necessary  tlie  following  short  form  of  power  of  attorney^ 
Tnay  de  added,  ]  and  I  constitute  the  said  Ricliard  Roe,  my 
attorney,  in  my  name  and  to  his  own  use,  to  take  all  neces- 
sary legal  proceedings  for  the  complete  recovery  and  enjoy- 
ment of  the  premises  hereinbefore  assigned,  with  power  of 
substitution. 

Witness  my  hand  and  seal,  the  —  day  of ,  187 — . 

John  Doe,  {Seal.'] 


ASSIGNMENT,  BY  INDORSEMENT,   OP  A  MOKTGAGE  IN  FEE. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  the  within  nam- 
ed John  Den,  in  consideration  of  the  sum  of dollars  to 

me  paid  by  Richard  Fen,  receipt  of  which  is  hereby  acknow- 
ledged, &c.,  have  granted,  assigned,  released,  and  convey- 
ed, and  by  these  presents  do  hereby  grant,  assign,  release 
and  convey  unto  the  said  Richard  Fen  the  premises  and 
lands  within  conveyed  to  me  in  mortgage,  and  all  my  right, 
title,  interest,  and  estate  in  and  unto  the  same.  To  have 
and  to  hold  to  the  said  Richard  Fen,  his  heirs  and  assigns 
forever. 

{Clauses  of  warranty,  against  encumbrances,  for  further  as- 
surance of  title,  &c. ,  may  be  added  as  in  a  common  deed,  if 
necessary.] 

Witness  my  hand  and  seal,  the  —  day  of ,  187 — . 

In  the  presence  of 

John  Den,  [8eal.\ 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  123 

ABSOLUTE  ASSIGNMENT  OF  AN  ORDER  BY  INDORSEMENT. 

I,  the  within  named  John  Doe,  do  hereby  assign  end  trans- 
fer all  my  right,  title  and  interest  in  and  to  the  within  writ- 
ten order,  and  the  moneys  secured  thereby  unto  Richard 
Roe  and  his  assigns.     This  the  —  day  of ,  187 — . 

In  the  presence  of   ) 

.    \  John  Doe. 


AWARD  OF  ARBITRATORS. 

To  all  to  whom  these  presents  shall  come : — greeting. 

Know  ye,  that  whereas,  John  Den^  of  the  County  of  Chat- 
ham, and  RieJtard  Fen,  of  the  County  of  Wake,  did,  on  the- 

-  -  day  of ,  187 — ,  enter  into  a  bond  in  the  sum  of 

dollars,  conditioned  to  stand  to  and  abide  by  the  award 
and  decisions  of  the  arbitrators  in  a  certain  controversy  be- 
tween them,  [or  did  muiunlly  agree  to  stand  io  and  abide  hy^, 
when  no  bond  has  been  entered  into.  ] 

Now,  therefore,  be  it  remembered,  that  on  the  —  day  of 
,  187 — ,  the  undersigned  arbitrators  did  hear  and  ex- 
amine the  said  parties,  and.  having  maturely  and  impartial- 
ly considered  all  the  matters  involved  therein,  do  make 
.this  our  award  and  decision,  to-wit: 

1st.  We  do  award  that  John  Den  [state  the  award  in 
jjlain  languages.^ 

2d,  We  do  further  award  that  Richard  Fen  [here  state, 
again  the  award  in  plain  language,  and,  in  separate  numbered 
items  state  all  the  various  awards  ] 

Given  under  hand  and  seal,  the  —  day  of ,  187 — . 


tS^s.^Shott,  [^''^^'^^«^^^^ 


124  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINEkSS 

Bill  op  sale,  with  clause  of  warranty. 

North  Carolina, 

Chatliain  County. 

Know  all  men  by  these   presents,   that  I,  Kichard  Roe, 

for  and   in   consideration  of  the  sum  of dollars, 

to  me  paid  by  Jno.  Doe,  do  hereby  grant,  assign,  convey 
and  transfer  unto  the  said  Jno.  Doe  {here  mention  the  pro- 
•perty  conveyed.,')  to  have  and  to  hold  to  the  said  Jno.  Doe, 
his  executors,  administrators,  and  assigns  forever.  And  I 
do  covenant  for  myself,  my  executors,  adminstrators  and 
assigns,  to  and  with  the  said  Jno.  Doe,  his  executors,  ad- 
ministrators and  assigns,  to  warrant  and  defend  the  title 
hereby  conveyed  from  the  lawful  claim  of  any  and  all  per- 
sons whatsoever.  (If  this  Bill  of  Sale  is  given  by  a  sheriff 
or  constable,  he  should  recite  in  the  first  part  the  fact  of 
the  sale  under  execution,  and  after  the  word  ^'■iiyJiatsoever,'* 
add  the  words,  "  .so  far  as  my  o-ffice  and  duty  as  (sheriff  or 
constable)  requires,  and  no  further.) 

Witness  my  hand  and  seal  the  —  day  of  — ,187     . 

Richard  Roe,  [L.  S.] 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered  in  \ 
the  presence  of .     S 


BOND — simple. 


$100.00.  after  date,  I  promise  to  Jno.  Jones 

one  hundred  dollars  for  value  received.     Witness  my  hand 
and    seal  the  —  day  of  — ,  187  . 

Joseph  Stark,  [L.  S.j 
In  the  presence  of . 


AND  RAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.     125 

SIMPLE  BOND  WITH  PBINCIPAL  AND  SURETY. 

Twelve  months  after  date,  with  interest  from  date,  we, 
Jno.    Den  as  principal  and  Richard  Roe  and  Richard  Fen 
as  sureties,  promise  to  pay  Jno.  Doe  one  thousand  dollars 
for  value  received.     "Witness  our  hands  and  seals,   the  — 
day  of  —   187  . 

Jno.  Den,  [L.  S.] 
Richard   Roe,  [L.  S.] 
Richard  Fen,   [L.  S.] 
In  the  presence  of . 


BOND   with  condition. 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  John  Den,  am 
held  and  firmly  bounden  unto  Richard  Fen  in  the  sum  of 
one  thousand  dollars,  to  the  which  payment,  to  be  well  and 
truly  made,  I  bind  myself,  my  heirs,  executors  and  admin- 
istrators. 

Sealed  with  my  seal  the  —  day  of  — ,  187  . 

The  condition  of  the  above  obligation  is  such,  that 
whereas,  John  Den  hath  agreed  [to  deliver  unto  Richard  Fen 
100  bales  of  cotton,  weighing  not  less  than  400  Ihs.  each,  on  or 
be/ore  the  first  day  of  December,  187  .]  Now  if  the  said  Jno. 
Den  shall  well  and  truly  {deliver  the  cotton  as  hereinbefore 
recited.^  then  this  obligation  to  be  null,  void,  and  of  na 
efi'ect,  otherwise  of  full  force  and  effect. 

Witness  my  hand  and  seal  the  —  day  of  — ,  187  . 

Jno.  Den,  [L.  S.] 

In  the  presence  of . 


126  THE   MAX   OF   BUSINESS 

lien  bond  under  act  of  march  ist,  1867. 

North  Carolina,  ) 
Chatham  County.     \ 

Whereas,  A.  B.,  of  the  county  of ,  N.  C,  has  agreed 

to  make  advances  of  supplies  to  C.  D.  for  the  purpose  of 
agriculture  during  the  year  187  ,  to  the  value  and  amount 

of dollars ;  and  whereas,  as  the  said  C.  D.  desires  to 

secure  to  the  said  A.  B.  the  said  sum  in  accordance  with  the 
terms  of  the  Act  of  the  General  Assembly  of  North  Caro- 
lina, entitled  "  An  Act  to  secure  advances  for  agricultural 
purposes,''  ratified  the  1st  day  of  March,  1867;  therefore, 
in  consideration  thereof,  C.  D.  as  principal,  and  E.  F. 
and  G.  H.  as  sureties,  do  hereby  agree  with  the  said  A.  B. 
that  he  shall  have  an  interest  in  and  lein  upon  the  crops  of 

and   other  products  to  be  raised  during  the  year 

187  ,  upon  the  lands  of in  the  county  of  ,  occu- 
pied and  to  be  cultivated  by  C.  D.  during  the  said  year 
187  to  the  full  value  of  the  advances  to  be  made  as  afore- 
said. And  for  further  security,  the  said  C,  D.  hereby  bar- 
gains and  sells  to  the  said  A.  B.  the  following  articles  of 
personal  property  now  in  the  possession  of  the  said  C.  D., 

with  the  understanding  that  if  the  said  C.  D.  shall  well 
and  truly  pay  to  the  said  A.  B.  the  sum  advanced  on  or 
before  the  —  day  of  —  187  ,  then  the  said  lien  shall  be 
discharged,  and  the  said  property  revert  in  C.  D. :  other- 
wise the  said  A.  B.  shall  have  power  to  take  into  his  pos- 
session said  crop  and  other  property,  and  sell  the  same  for 
cash  after  ten  days  notice. 

In  testimony  of  all  which  things  the  said  parties  have 

hereunto  set  their  hands  the  —  day  of ,  187     . 

A.  B. 

C.   D. 

E.  F. 

In  the  presence  of .  G.  H. 


AND  EAIL  EOAD  CALCULATOR-     127 

FORTHCOMING  BOND. 
IfOKTH   CaEOLINA,  ) 

'^ County.      \ 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  we and 

are  held  and  firmly  bounden  unto ,  sheriff 


{or  constable)  of county,  in  the  sum  of dollars, 

to  which  payment  well  and  truly  to  be  made,  we  bind  our- 
selves, our  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  jointly  and 

severally.     Sealed  with  our  seals  the  —  day  of ,  187    . 

The  condition  of  the  above  obligation  is,  that    whereas 

the  said ,  sheriff  [or  constable)  as  aforesaid,  hath  this 

day  levied  an  execution  in  favor  of against  the  above 

bounden  upon  the  following  personal  property  of 

the  said ,  to-wit:  (here   set  out  the  various  articles  of 

property^)  and   hath  permitted  said  property  to  remain  in 

the  possession   of  the  said  ;  now,    therefore,  if  the 

said ,  on  the  —  day  of  — ,  187  ,  the  day  of  sale  ap- 
pointed for  the  same,  or  upon  any  other  day  to  be  hereafter 

named  by  the  said ,  sheriff  {or  constable)  as  aforesaid, 

shall  well  and  truly  deliver  to   said ,  sheriff  {or  con. 

stable)  as  aforesaid,  all  the  said  personal  property  to  answer 
said  execution ;  then  the  above  obligation  to  be  null  and 
void :  otherwise  to  remain  in  full  force  and  virtue. 

,  [L.  S.] 

,  [L.  S.] 

,  [L.  S.l 

In  the  presence  of . 


128  THE   MAI^   OF   BUSINESS 

COVENANTS 

The  loll  owing  forms  may  be  inserted  in  Deeds  as  the 
various  cases  may  require  : 

Of  one  Person  wiih  one  Person. 

And  the  said  Jno.  Den,  for  himself,  his  heirs,  executors 
and  administrators,  and  for  each  and  every  of  them,  doth 
covenant  with  the  said  Richard  Fen,  his  heirs,  executors 
and  administrators,  that  [here  insert  the  covenant  in  plain 
language.  ] 

N.  B.  Sometimes  the  word  ''assigns''  should  be  added 
after  the  name  of  the  covenantee.  In  covenants  respecting 
personal  property  the  word  ''heirs'^  should  be  omitted.  Its 
insertion,  however,  can  do  no  harm,  and  it  is  bettter  that 
unprofessional  persons  should  always  insert  it.  Such  per- 
sons also,  out  of  abundance  of  caution,  might  use  the  word 
''assigns''  after  the  covenantee,  thus:  "with  the  said  Richard 
Fen,  his  heirs,  executors,  administrators  and  assigns.'''' 

A  Joint  Covenant  with  one  Person. 

And  the  aforesaid  Jno.  Doe,  Richard  Roe  and  Jno.  Den 
for  themselves,  their  heirs,    executors  and  administrators, 
and  for  each  and  every  of  them,    do  covenant  with  the 
aforesaid  Richard  Fen,  his  heirs,  executors,  administrators, 
(and  assigns,)  that,  &c. 

A  Joint  and  Several  Covenant. 

Same  as  above,  except  as  follows:  "do  jointly  and  sev- 
erally covenant,"  &c. 

Note. — All  the  usual  covenants  in  a  deed  will  be  found 
under  ^' Deeds." 


AND  EAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  129 

DEEDS. 

Beed  Poll,  with  Covenants  of  THte,  Warranty,  &c, 

!NoRTH  Carolina,  ) 
Chatham  County.     ) 

Know  all  men  by  these  presents,  that  I,  Jno.  Doe,  of  the 
county  and  State  aforesaid,  in  consideration  of dol- 
lars to  me  paid  by  Richard  Roe,  the  receipt  of  which  is 
hereby  acknowledged,  have  bargained  and  sold,  granted 
and  conveyed,  and,  by  these  presents,  do  give,  grant,  con- 
Tey,  bargain  and  sell  unto  Richard  Roe,  his  heirs  and  as- 
signs, all  that  tract  or  parcel  of  land  situated  in 

oounty  and  State  of ,  lying  upon  the  waters  of , 

and  bounded  as  follows,    to-wit:  beginning  at  [here  set  oui 

ike  boundaries  and^  description  of  the  land,]  containing 

acres,  more  or  less;  together  with  all  the  rights,  ways, 
privileges  and  appurtenances  in  anywise  to  said  land  apper- 
taining and  belonging.  To  have  and  to  hold  the  above- 
mentioned  lands  and  premises  to  the  said  Richard  Roe,  his 
heirs  and  assigns,  to  his  and  their  use  and  behoof  forever. 

And  I,  the  said  Jno.  Doe,  for  myself,  my  heirs,  execu- 
tors and  administrators,  do  covenant  with  the  said  Richard 
Roe,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  that  I  am  lawfully  seized  in  fee 
simple  of  the  af oregranted  lands  and  premises :  that  they 
are  free  from  all  encumbrances  of  any  and  every  kind  what- 
soever: that  I  have  a  good  right  to  sell  and  convey  the 
same  to  the  said  Roe  as  aforesaid ;  and  that  I  will,  and  my 
heirs,  executors  and  administrators  shall,  warrant  and  de~ 
fend  the  same  to  the  said  Richard  Roe,  his  heirs  and  assigns 
forever,  against  the  lawful  demands  of  all  persons  what- 
fioever. 


130  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

In  testimony  of  all  which  things  I  have  hereunto  set  my 

hand  and  seal  the  —  day  of ,  187     . 

Jko.  Doe,  [L.  S.] 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered   ^ 

in  the  presence  of  ! 

Jno.  Den,  | 

Richard  Fen.  J 


DEED  INDENTED  OB  INDENTURE  IN  FULL  WITH  ALL  THE 
USUAL  COVENANTS. 

This  indenture  made  the  —  day  of ,  187 — ,  between 

John  Doe,  of party  of  the  first  part,  and  Richard  Roe, 

of party  of  the  second  part : 

Witnesseth,  that  the  said  party  of  the  first  part,  for  and 

in  consideration  of  the  sum  of dollars,  lawful  money  of 

the  United  States,  to  him  paid  by  the  said  party  of  the  sec- 
ond part,  at  or  before  the  ensealing  and  delivery  of  these 
presents,  the  receipt  of  which  is  hereby  acknowledged,  and 
the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs,  executors,  and 
administrators  forever  released  and  discharged  from  the 
payment  of  the  same,  by  these  presents  hath  given,  granted, 
bargained,  sold,  aliened,  remised,  released,  confirmed,  and 
conveyed,  and  by  these  presents,  doth  give,  grant,  bargain, 
sell,  alien,  remise,  release,  and  convey  to  the  said  party  of 
the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  all  that  tract  or  par- 
cel of  land,  situate  in  the  County  of and  State  of , 

lying  upon  the  waters  of and  bounded  as  follows,  to 

wit :  beginning  at  [here  set  out  the  boundaries  and  descrip- 
tions of  the  land,]  together  with  all  and  singular  the  tene- 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  131 

ments,  hereditaments,  and  appurtenances  thereunto  belong- 
ing, or  in  anywise  whatsoever  appertaining ;  and  the  rever- 
sion and  reversions ;  remainder  and  remainders ;  rents ;  is- 
sues ;  and  profits  thereof ;  and,  also  all  the  estate,  right, 
title,  interest,  property,  possession,  claim,  and  demand 
whatsoever,  as  well  at  law  as  in  equity,  of  the  said  party  of 
the  first  part,  of,  in,  and  to  the  aforegranted  lands  and  pre- 
mises with  the  appurtenances  thereunto  belonging. 

To  have  and  to  hold  the  aforementioned  lands  and  pre- 
mises to  the  aforesaid  party  of  the  second  part,  h.l,§  heirs  and 
assigns,  to  his  and  their  own  proper  use  and  behoof  forever. 

And  the  said  John  Doe,  party  of  the  first  part  as  afore- 
said, for  himself,  his  heirs,  executors,  and  administrators, 
doth  covenant  with  the  said  Richard  Roe,  party  of  the  sec- 
ond part  as  aforesaid,  his  heirs,  and  assigns,  that  the  afore- 
said John  Doe  at  the  time  of  the  ensealing  and  delivery  of 
this  indenture,  was  lawfully  seized  in  his  own  right  of  a 
good,  absolute,  and  indefeasible  estate  of  inheritance,  la 
fee  simple,  of,  in,  and  to,  all  and  singular  the  lands  and  ap- 
purtenances hereinbefore  conveyed;  and  has  good  right, 
full  power,  and  lawful  authority  to  bargain,  sell  and  convey 
the  same  in  manner  and  form  as  aforesaid ;  and,  that  the 
said  party  of  the  second  part  his  heirs  and  assigns  shall 
and  may,  at  all  times  hereafter  peaceably  and  quietly  have, 
hold,  use,  possess,  occupy,  and  enjoy  the  above  conveyed 
lands  and  premises  with  the  appurtenances  thereunto  be- 
longing, without  any  let,  suit,  trouble,  molestation,  evic- 
tion, or  disturbance,  of  the  said  party  of  the  first  part,  his 
heirs  and  assigns,  or  of  any  other  person  or  persons  lawful- 
ly claiming  the  same ;  and,  that  the  aforesaid  lands  and 


132  THE  MAN  OF  BUSINESS 

tenements  now  are  free,  clear,  and  discharged,  and  unen- 
cumbered of  and  from  all  former  grants,  titles,  charges,  es- 
tates, judgments,  taxes,  assessments  and  encumbrances  of 
whatsoever  kind  or  nature ;  and,  that  the  said  party  of  the 
first  part  and  his  heirs,  and  all  and  every  person  or  persons 
whosoever  lawfully  or  equitably  deriving  any  estate,  right, 
title  or  interest  of,  in,  or  to,  the  hereinbefore-granted  lands 
and  premises,  by,  from,  or  under,  or  in  trust  for  them  or 
either  of  them,  shall  and  will,  at  any  time  or  times  hereaf- 
ter, upon  tft«  reasonable  request  of  the  aforesaid  party  of 
the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  and  at  the  proper 
costs  and  charges  of  the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  his 
heirs  and  assigns,  make,  do,  and  execute,  or  cause  to  be 
made,  done,  and  executed,  all  and  any  such  further  and 
other  lawful  and  reasonable  acts,  conveyances,  and  assur- 
ances in  the  law,  for  the  better  and  more  effectually  vesting 
and  confirming  the  lands  and  premises  hereinbefore  con- 
veyed, and  so  intended  to  be  in,  and  conveyed  to,  the  said 
party  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns  forever,  as  by 
the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  his 
or  their  counsel  learned  in  the  law,  shall  be  reasonably  ad- 
vised and  required. 

And  the  said  John  Doe^  his  heirs,  executors  and  adminis- 
trators, the  above-described  lands  and  premises  hereinbe- 
fore conveyed,  with  the  appurtenances  thereunto  belong- 
ing, to  the  said  party  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  as- 
signs, against  the  said  party  of  the  first  part,  his  heirs  and 
assigns,  and  against  all  and  every  and  person  or  persons 
whomsoever  lawfully  claiming  or  to  claim  the  aforesaid 
lands  and  premises,  shall  and  will  warrant  and  by  this  in- 
denture forever  defend. 


AND  EAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.     133 

In  testimony  of  all  which  things  the  said  party  of  the  first 
part  both  hereunto  set  his  hand  and  afiixed  his  seal,  this 

the  —  day  of ,  A.  D.,  187—. 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered  )  John  Doe,  [Seal.] 

in  the  presence  of  > 

John  Den,  ) 

Richard  Fen. 


DEED  OF  QUIT-CLAIM. 

This  Indenture  made  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D.,  187 — , 

between  John  Boe,  of ,  and  Bichard  Boe,  of . 

Witnesseth,  that  the  said  John  Doe^  for  and  in  considera- 
tion of  the  sum  of dollars,  to  him  paid  by  the  said 

Bichard  Boe^  receipt  of  which  is  hereby  acknowledged,  hath 
released,  remised,  and  quit -claimed,  and,  by  these  presents, 
doth  hereby  remise,  release,  and  quit-claim  unto  Bichard 
Boe^  his  heirs  and  assigns  forever,  all  that  tract  or  parcel  of 

land  situated  in  the  County  of and  State  of , 

lying  upon  the  waters  of and  bounded  as  follows,  to 

wit :  beginning  at  [here  insert  the  description  and  boundaries,  ] 

containing acres,  more  or  less ;  together  with  all  and 

singular  the  tenements,  hereditaments,  and  appurtenances 
thereunto  belonging ;  and  all  right,  title,  or  estate,  claim 
and  demand  whatsoever,  as  well  at  law  as  in  equity,  of  the 
said  John  Doe  of,  in,  and  to,  the  above-described  premises. 

To  have  and  to  hold  all  and  singular  the  above-mention- 


134  THE  MAN  OP  BUSINESS 

ed  lands  and  premises  unto  the  said  Richard  Boe^  his  heirs 

and  assigns  forever. 

In  witness  whereof,  &c. 
Signed,  sealed  and  delivered  )  John  Doe,  \^Seal.'\ 

in  the  presence  of  > 

John  Den,  ) 

KicHABD  Fen. 

Note. — ^Whenever  interlineations^  additions  or  erasures  are 
made  in  drafting  a  deed,  the  fact  should  be  noticed  at  the 
foot  of  the  deed  thus  '•''  all  interlineations^  erasures  and  addi- 
tions made  he/ore  signing  and  sealing.  ^^ 

Note. — ^No  forms  are  inserted  for  deeds  of  married  wo- 
men, sheriff's,  clerk's,  administrators  and  other  officers  of 
the  law.  They  always  depend  on  circumstances  for  their 
form.  In  all  such  cases,  counsel  learned  in  the  law  should 
be  consulted,  and  the  deed  drafted  by  them. 


DEED  IN  TRUST. 

This  Indenture,  in  three  parts,  made  the  —  day  of , 

A.  D.,  187 — ,  between  John  Doe^  of  the  first  part,  Richard 
Roe.,  of  the  second  part,  and  [here  should  he  inserted  the 
names  of  the  party  or  parties  for  whom  the  trust  is  created^  in 
ease  of  creditors  it  will  le  sufficient  to  say  ''  creditors  of  the  said 
John  Doe,"]  of  the  third  part. 

Witnesseth,  that  the  said  John  Doe^  party  of  the  first  part, 

for  and  in  consideration  of  the  sum  of dollars,  {jgen- 

erally  a  nominal  sum  of  "owe,"  *'j^ve"  or  "^^ti"  dollars,']  to 
him  paid  by  Richard  Roe,  party  of  the  second  part,  receipt 
of  which  is  hereby  acknowledged,  hath  bargained  and  sold, 


AND  EAIL  KOAD  CALCULATOR.     135 

and,  by  these  presents,  doth  bargain  and  sell  unto  the  said 
Richard  Roe^  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  all 

that  tract  or  parcel  of  land,  situate  in  the  County  of 

and  State  of  ,  lying  upon  the  waters  of ,  and 

bounded  as  follows:  beginning  at  [here  insert  boundaries  and 

descriptionSy']  containing acres,  more  or  less,  \if  per-^ 

sonal  property  J  also  is  conveyed^  insert  as  follows  '"'■  and  the  Jol- 
lowing  personal  property^  to-wit :'''  setting  it  forth  explicitly .~\ 

To  have  and  to  hold  to  the  said  Richard  Roe,  of  the  sec- 
ond part,  his  heirs  and  assigns  forever. 

Li  trust,  nevertheless,  that  [here  insert  the  trusts  in  plain 
language.  If,  for  creditors,  state  all  the  duties  which  the  trus- 
tee is  to  perform,  such  as  time,  place,  manner  of  sale,  &c.  ] 

And  the  said  John  Doe,  of  the  first  part,  for  himself,  his 
heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  covenants  with  the  said 
Richard  Roe,  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  that 
he  is  lawfully  seized  in  fee  of  the  abo^e  described  property 
and  premises ;  that  they  are  free  from  encumbrances ;  that 
he  has  good  right  and  title  to  sell  and  convey  the  same ;  and 
that  he  will,  and  his  heirs,  executors  and  administrators, 
shall  warrant  and  defend  the  title  to  the  same  to  the  said 
Richard  Roe,  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns  for*- 
ever  against  the  lawful  demands  of  all  persons. 

And  the  said  Richard  Roe,  of  the  second  part,  for  himself, 
his  heirs,  executors  and  administrators,  covenants  with  the 
said  John  Doe,  of  the  first  part,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  that 
he  will  well,  truly  and  faithfully  perform  the  duties  and 
trusts  emunerated  and  specified  in  this  deed. 

In  testimony  of  all  which  things  the  said  John  Doe  and 


136  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

the  said  Bicliard  Boe  have  hereunto  set  their  hands  and 

seals,  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D.,  187 — . 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered  )         John  Doe,        \^8eal.\ 
in  the  presence  of  >•         Richard  Roe,  \8eal,\ 

JoBTN  Den,  ) 

Richard  Fen. 


DEED  IN  mortgage. 

This  Indenture  made  this  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D., 

187 — ,  between  JolmDen^  of  the  first  part,  and  Richard  Fen, 
of  the  second  part. 

Witnesseth,  that  the  said  John  Den^  for  and  in  considera- 
tion of  the  sum  of  one  dollar  to  him  paid  by  Micha/rd  Fen^ 
of  the  second  part,  receipt  of  which  is  hereby  acknowledg- 
ed, and  the  further  considerations  which,  in  this  deed, 
hereinafter  appear,  hath  bargained  and  sold,  and,  by  these 
presents,  doth  bargain  and  sell  unto  the  said  Richa/rd  Fen, 
his  heirs  and  assigns  all  that  tract  or  parcel  of  land  situate 

in  the  County  of and  State  of ,  lying  upon  the 

waters  of and  bounded  as  follows,  to-wit :  beginning 

\here  insert  the  descriptions  and  boundaries,]  containing 

acres,  more  or  less.  [If  personal  property  also  is  conveyed, 
then  add  here  '•^and  the  following  personal  property,  to-wit,'*'* 
netting  it  forth  eo'plicitly.  ] 

To  have  and  to  hold  to  the  aforesaid  Richard  Fen,  his 
heirs  and  sssigns  forever. 

And  the  said  John  Den,  for  himself,  his  heirs,  executors 
and  administrators  doth  covenant  with  the  said  Richard 
Fen,  his  heirs  and  assigns,  that  he,  the  said  John  Ben,  is 
lawfully  seized  in  fee  simple  of  the  above  described  pr^p- 


AND  BAIL  EOAD  CALCULATOR.     137 

€rty  and  premises ;  that  the  same  is  free  from  all  encum- 
brances; that  he  has  good  right  to  sell  and  convey  the 
N  same ;  that  he  will,  and  his  heirs,  executors,  and  adminis- 
trators, shall,  warrant  and  defend  the  same  to  the  said 
Richard  Boe^  his  heirs  and  assigns  forever  against  the  law- 
ful demands  of  all  persons  whomsoever. 

On  condition,  nevertheless,  [that  if  the  said  Jno.  Beriy 
his  heirs,  executors  and  administrators  shall  well  and  truly  pa/ij 
to  the  said  Richard  Fen^  his  executoi's^  administrators  and  as- 

signSf  the  sumo/ dollars  on  or  before  the  —  day  of , 

187  ,  with  the  interest,  costs  and  chm'ges  thereon  accru^d^l 
then  this  deed  and  conveyance  to  be  null,  void,  and  of  no 
effect;  otherwise  to  remain  in  full  force  and  effect.  \_Tf  a 
power  of  sale  is  conferred,  then  add  here  as  follows :  ^'' and  if 
the  said  sum  of  money,  or  any  portion  thereof,  hereinbefore  reci- 
ted^ shall  de  and  remain  unpaid  at  the  date  aforesaid,  then  the 
said  Richard  Fen  and  his  assigns  shall  have  power  to  sell  the 
same  in  manner  and  form  as  follows,''''  stating  the  terms,  time, 
manner,  &c.,  of  the  sale.] 

And  the  said  Richard  Fen  of  the  first  part,  for  himself, 
his  heirs,  executors,  administrators  and  assigns,  covenants 
with  the  said  Jno.  Den  of  the  second  part,  his  heirs,  execu- 
tors, administrators  and  assigns,  that  he  will  well  and  truly 
perform  all  stipulations  contained  in  this  deed  and  im- 
posed upon  him  by  the  same. 

In  witness  whereof,  the  said  Jno.  Den  of  the  first  part, 

and  the  said  Richard  Fen  of  the  secornd  part,  have  hereunto 

set  their  hands  and  seals  the  —  day  of  — — ,  A.  D.,  187     . 

Signed,  sealed  and  delivered  ^ 

in  the  presence  of  /       Jno.  Fen,  [L.  S.] 

Jno.  Doe,  f      Richakd  Fen,  [L.  S.] 

Richard  Roe.  ^ 


138  THE  MAN  OF  BUSINESS 

Note. — After  the  words  ''on  condition,  nevertheless,  thai,^* 
in  the  above  deed,  the  conditions  should  be  set  out  in  plain 
and  explicit  language  in  that  portion  included  between  [  ] 
according  to  the  circumstances  which  give  rise  to  the 
mortgage. 


CHATTEL  MORTGAGE. 


I,  Jno.  Doe,  of  the  county  of ,  and  State  of 


am  indebted  to  Richard  Roe,   of  the  county  of  ,  and 

State  of ,  in  the  sum  of dollars  due  by  [here 

state  whether  h^  open  account,  note,  <&c.,]  which  will  be  due  on 

the  —  day  of ,  187    ,  and  to  secure  the  due  payment 

of  the  same,  I  hereby  convey  to  him  the  following  articles 
of  personal  property,  to-wit :  [here  set  out  the  articles  ex- 
pliciUi/.] 

On  condition,  neverthelels,  that  if  I  fail  to  pay  said 

debt  and  interest  on  or  before  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D., 

187  ,  then  he  may  sell  said  property,  or  so  much  thereof 
as  may  be  necessary  to  satisfy  said  debt,  by  public  auction 
for  cash,  after  having  first  given  twenty  days'  notice  at 
three  public  places,  and  apply  the  proceeds  of  said  sale  ta 
the  discharge  of  said  debt,  and  pay  the  surplus,  if  any,  to 
me. 

Witness  my  hand   and  seal  this  the  —  day  of  ,  A» 

D.,  187  . 

Jno.  Doe,  [L.  S.] 
In  the  presence  of 


Jno.  Den 

RiCHARB 


.    I 

Fen.     > 


A^D  KAIL  EOAD  CALCULATOR.  139* 

LEASE. 

This  Indenture  made,  this  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D.  187 — , 

between  John  Doe,  of ,  and  Richard  Roe^  of , 

witnesseth  that  the  said  John  Doe  doth  hereby  demise,  lease, 
and  to  farm  let,  unto  Richard  Roe^  that  piece  or  parcel  of 
land  known  as  [here  describe  the  premises  which  are  the  subject 

of  the  lease,]  to  hold  for  the  term  of  years  from  the 

—  day  of ,  A.  D.,  187 — ,  during  the  said  term  unto  the 

said  Richard  Roe ;  yielding  and  paying,  unto  the  said  John 
Roe  or  his  assigns  as  rent  and  render  therefor  \here  insert 
what  the  lease  is  to  pay  for  the  use  of  the  premises,  whether  a 
pa/rt  of  the  crop,  Tnoney,  &c.,  and  when  to  he  paid,  whether 
yemly^  half-yearly,  quarterly,  monthly,  &c.  State  all  these 
plainly  and  fully.] 

I.  And  the  said  Richard  Roe  covenants  and  agrees  to  pay 
the  rent  as  aforesaid  in  manner  as  aforesaid,  to  the  said 
John  Doe  or  his  assigns ;  and  to  deliver  up  the  premises  to^ 
the  said  John  Doe  or  his  attorney,  at  the  end  of  the  term,  in 
as  good  condition  as  when  received,  reasonable  wear  and 
tear  from  the  use  thereof,  and  casualty  from  fire,  tempest 
and  other  unavoidable  cause,  being  excepted :  that  the  said 
John  Doe,  his  attorney,  or  assigns  may,  at  all  times,  enter 
the  premises  to  view  the  same  and  make  improvements 
thereon  at  reasonable  times. 

n.  The  said  John  Doe  covenants  that  the  said  Richard  Roe 
shall  have  quiet  and  peaceable  possession  during  the  said 
term,  and  that  he  will  warrant  and  defend  the  title  against 
the  claims  of  all  persons  as  to  the  possession  of  the  said  pre- 
mises during  the  said  term. 

In  witness  of  all  which  things  the  said  John  Doe  and 


140  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

Hichard  Boe  have  hereunto  signed  their  names  and  aflSxed 

their  seals,  the  —  day  of ,  187 — . 

In  the  presence  of     ) 
John  Den,  >  John  Doe,        \^8e'd.'\ 

RicHAKD  Fen.        )  Richard  Roe,  [/SeaZ.] 

Note. — Other  covenants  may  be  inserted  as  may  be  agreed 
on  by  the  parties,  the  forms  of  which  will  be  found  below. 
The  covenant  of  the  lessor  for  quiet  enjoyment  and  defense 
of  title,  as  a  matter  of  form  only^  should  come  last  in  the 
deed. 

Covenant  to  pay  taxes. 

And  the  said  Itichard  Boe  covenants  and  agrees  to  pay  all 
taxes  and  duties  lawfully  imposed  and  levied  on  the  pre- 
mises demised  and  let  unto  him  during  his  said  term. 

,     Covenant  not  to  commit  waste. 

And  the  said  Bichard  Boe  covenants  that  he  will  not  com- 
mit waste  on  the  demised  premises. 

Covenant  not  to  underlet. 

And  the  said  BicJiard  Boe  covenants  and  agrees  that  he 
will  not  underlet  the  said  demised  premises,  or  any  part 
thereof,  nor  permit  any  other  person  or  persons  to  occupy 
the  same  or  any  part  or  portion  thereof  without  the  consent 
.{"m  writing,''^  if  the  parties  so  agree,]  of  the  said  John  Boe 
or  his  assigns. 

Covenant  under  the  '"''Act  ^j/"  1868- 9,  Sees.  Id  and  14,  Laws  of 
Worth  Ca/rolina,  giving  the  Lessor  a  Lien  on  the  Crop  as  Or 
security  for  the  rent. 

And  the  said  Bicliard  Boe,  for  himself,  his  executors  and 
administrators,  covenants  and  agrees  with  the  said  John  Boe 


AND  RAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.  141 

and  his  assigns,  that  the  said  John  Boe  shall  have  a  lien  up- 
on the  crops  to  be  grown  upon  the  aforesaid  demised  pre- 
mises, and  the  said  Roe  as  aforesaid  hereby  transfers,  and 
assigns  to  the  said  John  Doe^  all  his  right,  title,  and  inter- 
est in  the  crops  to  be  grown  on  the  premises  as  aforesaid 
for  the  sole  purpose  of  constituting  a  lien  and  security  on 
said  crop  for  the  rents  which  may  be  now  due,  or  may  here- 
after become  due  during  the  said  term,  as  well  as,  and  also 
for  the  due  and  faithful  performance  of  each,  every,  and  all 
stipulations  contained  in  the  said  dead  of  demise  and  lease» 


lien  law — act  op  186  9-' 70 — form  op  notice  under 
section  3. — ^notice  op  sale  to  satisfy  a  lien. 

North  Carolina,  ) 
Chatham  County,    f 

Whereas,  the  undersigned  as  a  mechanic  and  artizan  has 
["wflwZd,  altered^  or  repaired  ^^]  the  following  personal  prop- 
erty, to- wit:  [here  enumerate  the  property,^  at  the  request  of 
John  Den^  the  legal  owner  or  possessor  of  the  same ;  and,  as 
the  costs  and  charges  therefor  have  remained  unpaid  for  the 

space  of days ;  the  undersigned  will  sell  the  same  on 

the  —  day  of ,  187 — ,  at  —  o'clock,  at ,  to  the 

highest  bidder  for  cash,  to  discharge  said  debt  and  lien, 
due  and  owing  as  aforesaid. 

Richard  Fen* 


142  THE  MAN  OF  BUSINESS 

FORMS   UNDER  SECTIONS  4   AND   5. — ENTRY  TO  BE  MADE  BY 
MAGISTRATE  OP  FILING  THE  CLAIM. 

^^r,^  <^T''"',^  I  In  a  Jmtioe's  Court. 
Chatham  County.  ) 

Be  it  remembered  that  on  the  —  day  of ,  187—, 

personally  appeared  before  me,  John  Doe,  a  Justice  of  the 
Peace  in  and  for  said  County,  John  Ben,  who  filed  before 
me  the  account  and  claim  hereunto  annexed,  for  the   sum 

of dollars,  as  a  lien  upon  the  property  of  Bicha/rd  Fen^ 

under  the  Act  of  1869-'70. 

This  the  —  day  of ,  187—.  John  Doe,  J.  P. 

Note  1st. — Under  Sec.  4,  if  the  debt  for  work  and  labor 
done,  is  for  fifty  dollars  or  less,  the  property  must  be  re- 
tained by  the  mechanic  or  artisan  who  ' '  made,  repaired,  or 
altered''''  it,  for  thirty  days,  before  advertising  it  for  sale. 
If  the  debt  be  over  fifty  dollars,  the  mechanic  or  artisan 
must  retain  the  property  for  ninety  days  before  advertising 
it  for  sale.  The  notice,  under  Sec.  4,  must  be  inserted  for 
two  weeks  in  some  newspaper  published  in  the  County 
where  the  work  was  done ;  but,  if  no  newspaper  be  pub- 
lished in  the  County,  then  the  notice  must  he  posted  ^Hn  three 
of  tJie  most  public  places  in  the  county,  town  or  city  in  which 
the  worTc  may  have  teen  done.  The  two  weeks'  notice  must 
be  two  weeJcs  exclusive  of  the  day  of  sale. 

Note  2d. — "The  proceeds  of  the  said  sale  shall  be  ap- 
plied first  to  the  discharge  of  the  said  lien  and  the  expenses 
and  costs  of  keeping  and  selling  such  property,  and  the  re- 
mainder, if  any,  shall  be  paid  over  to  the  owner  thereof.'  a 
Last  clause  of  Sec.  3. 

Remark. — It  seems  that  Sec.  3,  does  not  create  any  new 


AND  RAIL  ROAD  CALCULATOR.     143 

lien  ;  but,  is  aflu-matory  of  the  lien  which  the  mechanic  or 
artizan  had  at  common  law.  And  it  seems  the  object  of  Sec.  3, 
is  to  give  a  safe  and  speedy  remedy  for  enforcing  the  lien. 
It  seems,  therefore,  that  liens  acquired  in  the  cases  mention 
ed  under  Sec.  3,  need  not  be  filed  before  a  Justice  or  Sup- 
erior Court  Clerk,  as  the  mechanic  is  already  in  possession 
of  the  property.  If  the  mechanic  or  artizan  parts  with  the 
possession  of  the  property,  his  right  to  the  remedy,  under 
Sec.  3,  it  seems,  would  be  gone.  The  mechanic  or  artizan, 
under  Sec.  3,  may  file  his  claim  if  he  chooses  so  to  do. 

Note  3d. — It  seems  that  Sections  4  and  5  define  the  re- 
medies to  enforce  the  liens  mentioned  in  Sections  1  and  3, 
and  may  be  filed  at  any  tiTne  after  the  materials  have  been 
furnished,  the  labor  performed,  &c.,  and  the  lien  may  at- 
tach from  time  of  filing.  In  suits  to  enforce  the  lien,  be- 
fore a  justice,  the  summons  should  state  in  addition,  the  fol- 
lowing words,  ' '  and  for  which  claim  of  lien  under  the  Act 
was  filed  before  A.  B.,  Esq."  It  is  to  be  tried  by  the  jus- 
tice as  any  other  cause. 

Remaek. — No  forms  are  inserted  applicable  to  the  Sup- 
erior Court,  in  such  cases,  counsel  learned  in  the  law  should 
be  invariably  consulted. 


144  THE  MAN  OF   BUSINESS 

FORM  OF  justice's  JUDGMENT  IN  CASES  UNDER  THE  LIEN  ACT»- 

NoRTH  Carolina,  )  r       r   *-   •>    n     * 
Chatham  County.  I  -^"  "  '''^"^'  ^''"'•«' 

John  Den,        "] 
Plaintiffj  \ 
Against         \  Action  to  enforce  lien  under  Act  1869-70* 
Richard  Fen, 

Defendant.  J 

In  the  above  entitled  cause,  it  is  ordered,  adjudged  and 
decreed,  that  the  plaintiff  do  recover  of  the  defendant  the 

sum  of dollars  and  costs  to  the  amount  of dollars, 

with  interest  on,  &c. 

And  it  is  further  ordered,  adjudged,  and  decreed,  that 
the  said  lien  of  the  plaintiff  is  valid,  and  binding  upon  the 
following  property  of  the  defendant,  to-wit :  [here  set  out 
the  property  upon  which  the  lien  attaches^  and  that  the  same 
be  condemned  to  be  sold  to  answer  the  debt  and  judgment 
in  this  cause. 

^  A.  B.,  J.  P. 


WILLS. 

In  the  name  of  God,  Amen.  I,  John  Den,  of  sound  and 
disposing  mind  and  memory,  being  desirous  of  settling  my 
worldly  affairs,  whilst  having  the  capacity  so  to  do,  do  de- 
clare this  to  be  my  last  will  and  testament : 

Item  1.    It  is  my  will  that,  i&c. 

Item  2.  I  give,  devise,  and  bequeath  unto  A.  B.,  &c^ 
[By  items  set  out  the  property  and  to  whom  given^  <&c.] 

Item  3.  I  appoint  and  make  0.  D.,  my  executor  to  this, 
my  last  will  and  testament. 

In  witness  of  all  which  things  I  have  hereunto  set  my 
hand  and  seal  this  the  —  day  of ,  A.  D.,  187 — . 

Signed,  sealed  and  pub- 
lished in  the  presence  of 
Richard  Roe, 
John  Doe. 


AND   RAIL   EOAD   CALCULATOR.  145 

Remark. — As  the  lien  law  is  of  great  importance  to  me- 
chanics and  laborers,  it  ish  ere  below  appended  as  found  in 
*'Laws  of  North  Carolina.  Chap.  CCVI.     1869-'70. 

AN   ACT   FOE,   THE   PROTECTION   OF   MECHANICS   AND   OTHER 
LABORERS,    MATERIALS,    ETC. 

Section  1.  The  General  Assenibly  of  North  Carolina  do 
enact,  That  every  building  built,  rebuilt,  repaired  or  im- 
proved, toget;her  with  the  necessary  lots  on  which  said 
building  may  be  situated,  and  every  lot,  farm  or  vessel  or 
a,ny  kind  of  property  not  herein  enumerated  shall  be  subject 
to  a  lien  for  the  same  or  material  furnished. 

Sec.  2.  The  lien  for  work  on  crops  or  farms  or  materials 
given  by  this  act  shall  be  preferred  to  every  other  lien  or 
incumbrance  which  attached  upon  the  property  subsequent 
to  the  time  at  which  the  work  was  commenced  or  the  mate- 
rials were  furnished. 

Sec.  3.  Any  mechanic  or  artlzan  who  shall  make,  alter 
or  repair  any  article  of  personal  property  at  the  request  of 
the  owner  or  legal  possessor  of  such  property,  shall  have  a 
lien  on  such  property  so  made,  altered  or  repaired  for  his 
just  and  reasonable  charge  for  his  work  done  and  material 
furnished,  and  may  hold  and  retain  possession  of  the  same 
until  such  just  and  reasonable  charges  shall  be  paid;  and, 
if  not  paid  for  within  the  space  of  thirty  days,  provided  it 
does  not  exceed  fifty  dollars,  if  over  fifty  dollars  ninety 
days,  after  the  work  shall  have  been  done,  such  mechanic 
or  artizan  may  proceed  to  sell  the  property  so  made,  alter- 
ed or  repaired  at  public  auction,  by  giving  two  weeks  pub- 
lic notice  of  such  sale  by  advertising  in  some  newspaper  in 


146  THE   MAN   OF   BUSINESS 

the  county  in  which  the  work  may  have  been  done,  or  if 
there  be  no  such  newspaper,  then  by  posting  up  notice  of 
such  sale  in  three  of  the  most  public  places  in  the  county, 
town  or  city  in  which  the  work  may  have  been  done,  and 
the  proceeds  of  the  said  sale  shall  be  applied  first  to  the 
discharge  of  the  said  lien  and  the  expenses  and  costs  of 
keeping  and  selling  such  property,  and  the  remainder,  if 
any,  shall  be  paid  over  to  the  owner  thereof. 

Sec.  4.  All  claims  under  two  hundred  dollars  may  be 
filed  in  the  office  of  the  nearest  magistrate  if  over  twa 
hundred  dollars,  in  the  office  of  the  superior  court  clerk  in 
any  county  where  the  labor  has  been  performed  or  the 
material  furnished ;  but  all  claims  filed  shall  be  in  detail, 
specifying  all  materials  furnished  or  labor  performed,  and 
at  what  date  it  was  performed  or  material  furnished  in  case 
of  contract  or  otherwise.  If  the  parties  interested  make  a 
special  contract  for  such  labor  performed,  or  if  such  mate- 
rial and  labor  are  specified  in  writing,  in  such  cases  it  shall 
be  decided  agreeable  to  the  terms  of  the  contract,  provided 
the  terms  of  such  contract  do  not  effect  the  lien  for  such 
labor  performed  or  materials  furnished. 

Sec.  5.  In  case  of  any  disagreement  between  the  parties 
interested  in  any  such  contract  it  may  be  brought  before  the 
nearest  magistrate  by  the  plaintiff  or  defendant  for  arbitra- 
tion or  otherwise,  as  the  magistrate  may  decide,  provided 
the  amount  claimed  does  not  exceed  two  hundred  dollars ; 
if  over  that  amount,  all  claims  must  be  filled  with  the  clerk 
of  the  superior  court  and  entered  on  the  calendar  so  as  to 
be  brought  before  the  court  at  the  first  term  after  the  filing 
of  any  claims.     The  judges  of  the  superior  court  may  ap- 


AND   RAIL   ROAD   CALCULATOR.  147 

point  referees  to  ascertain  the  proper  value  of  any  labor 
performed  on  any  building  or  farm,  or  any  material  fur- 
nished or  specified  in  the  application  at  the  time  of  plaintiff 
or  defendant  filing  his  petition. 

Sec.  6.  That  nothing  contained  in  this  act  shall  be  con- 
strued to  affect  the  rights  of  any  person  to  whom  any  debt 
may  be  due  for  any  work  done  which  priority  of  claims 
filed  with  the  proper  officer. 

Sec.  7.  Costs  are  allowed  to  either  party  upon  the  rules 
established  by  law  in  actions  arising  or  contracts  made  un- 
der the  code  of  civil  procedure. 

Sec.  8.  The  defendant  in  any  suit  to  enforce  the  lien 
shall  be  entitled  to  any  set  off  or  claim  arising  between  the 
contractors  during  the  performance  of  the  contract. 

Sec.  9.  That  all  laws  or  parts  of  laws  coming  in  coiaflict 
with  the  provisions  of  this  act  are  hereby  repealed. 

Sec.  10.  That  this  act  shall  be  in  force  from  and  after 
its  ratification. 

Ratified  the  38th  day  of  March,  A.  D.  1870. 


North  Caroima  State  Library 
Raleigh 


ADVERTISEMENT.        .  I 

\V.  H.  H.  ITTCKEl?,  R.  6,  TUCKER.  T.  MCGJiE. 

W.  H.  &  R  S.  TUCKER  &  CO., 

WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL 

DEALERS  AND  JOBBERS  IN 

Jemgtt  mi  §mmiu  §x^  §>$&iU, 

Hats,  Boots,  Shoes,  Garpetings,  Notions,  ^c, 
No,  23  and  25  Fayetteville  Street, 

RALEIGH,  N.  C. 
AN  ANALYTICAL 

AND 

ILLUSTRATIVE  AND  CONSTRUCTIVE  GRAMMAR 

OF 

ENGLISH    LANGUAGE 

BY 

REV.  PROF.  BRANTLEY  YORK. 


IW  TWO  PARTS. 

Accompanied  by  several  original  diagrams,  exhibiting  an 
occular  illustration  of  some  of  the  most  difficult  principles 
of  the  source  of  language;  also,  an  extensive  glossarj*^  of 


II  ADVERTISEMENT. 

the  derivation  of  the  principal  scientific  terms  and  in  this 
work. 

The  plan  of  teaching,  as  laid  down  in  this  work,  is  en- 
dorsed by  the  most  accomplished  teachers  in  this  and  other 
States.  It  meets  a  want  long  felt  in  our  schools.  It  simpli- 
fies the  study  of  grammar,  and  leads  the  student  to  seek  by 
the  simplest  methods,  the  true  Philosophy  of  Language. 


TES7IM0NAL. 

Among  others,  the  Rev.  A.  W.  Mangum,  A.  B.,  in  a  re- 
view of  the  work,  says : 

"But  it  is  Ms  Grammar  which  I  wish  especially  to  recomniMid,  Those 
who  are  acquainted  with  the  various  Grammars  of  our  language  will  readily 
admit  that  all  the  pretended  new  ones,  published  for  the  last  fifty  years 
have  been  little  more  than  copies  of  the  ideas  of  those  before  them,  with  a 
change  in  expression  or  words  and  arrangement.  I  can  safely  say  that 
Prof.  York's  is  a  new  Grammar.  It  contains  originality,  and  that  originality 
is  unquestionably  improvement. 

All  who  have  taught  or  studied  English  Grammar  are  aware  that  general- 
ly the  memory  is  the  chief,  and  often  the  only  faculty  of  the  mind  exercised 
by  the  learner;  but  Prof.  York's  requires  especially  the  exercises  of  reason, 
and  thus  enables  the  student  to  Incorporate  its  rules  and  principles  into  his 
thus  enables  the  student  to  incorporate  its  rules  and  principjes  into  bis 
habits  of  thinking,  speaking  and  writing.  Unlike  others,  he  carefully  gives 
reasons  for  his  rules  and  principles.  He  has  made  it  a  grand  objeci!  to 
teach  the  language  with  the  Grammar,  thus  again  outstripping  others. 

He  has  given  plain,  pointed  and  comprehensive  i^ules  for  punctuation. 
Every  one  knows  the  diflftoulty  of  learning  to  punctuate  correctly,  and  also 
how  ineflaoient  the  rules  of  most  authors  on  punctuation  are.  Prof.  York's 
rules  are  easily  understood  and  truly  practical  A  glossary  of  all  the  techni- 
cal! terms  used  is  annexed  to  the  volume;  a  great  advantage  to  the  student, 
as  he  seldom  knows  anything  about  Latin  or  Greek. 

In  fine,  the  author  detects  and  exposes  the  imperfectione  of  others ;  ex- 
plodes time-honored  errors ;  establishes  new  truths;  discovers  new  princi- 
ples ;  and  produces  positive  and  valuable  improvements  in  many  respects. 
Several  distinguished  teachers  in  high  sohools  in  North  Carolina  have  adop- 
ted  his  Grammar  as  a  text  book.  If  it  be  an  improvement  on  other  similar 
works,  surely  others  should  be  discarded  and  it  adopted. 

The  author  is  a  North  Carolinian,  and  If  his  book  possesses  real  merit. 
North  Carolinians  ought  to  encourage  his  talent  and  give  him  their  patron- 


ADVERTISEMENT. 


Ill 


S.  C.  POOL, 
of  WnJce. 


F.  O.  MORING, 
of  Chatham. 


(M 


WHOLESALE  GROCERS, 


AND 


111  Wm  lercl'ts, 

No.  2  Wilmington  SU, 


ettevslle  ' 


o. 


AND 


TifliP 


1.4  8/1  ? 


TT 


Neivspapers,  Magazines  and  Law  Boohs  of  every 

description  hound  in  the  very  hest 

Style  and  at  Lowest  Prices. 


IV  ADVEETISEMENT. 

J.  P.  GULLEY  &  B 

WHOLESALE  AND  RETAIL  DEALERS  IN 


irjf  ra 


9 

Boots  and  Shoes ^  Rats  and  Caps, 
Gents  Ready -Made  Shirts. 

South  Co7'ner  of  Fayetteville  St.  and  Exchange  Place. 
RALEiGH,  N.  C„ 

WM.    SHELBURN'S 


West  Side  Fayetteville  St.^ 

SLEIGH.    N.  c. 


mi 


All  kinds  of  Pictures  copied,  from  small  to  life-size,  and 
finished  in  India  Ink, 

WATER  COLORS  OR  OIL. 


NOTICE. 

Sark  Oloths  Maks  Cbarest  Looking-  Fsrreotypss. 
Colors  that  take  Very  Light:  Blue,  Purple,  Crimson, 
Pink,  Light  Red,  Light  Wine.     Gray  takes  gray. 

Colors  that  take  Very  Dark  :    Scarlet,  Brown,  Green, 
Dark  Red,  Dark  Yellow,  Dark  wine. 


The  new  shadow  Photograph  and  Ferreotypes  made  a  spe- 
cialty at  this  Gallery. 
Also  Enamelled  Photographs, 
Forenoon  is  the  best  time  to  take  Children's  Pictures.